all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
installation guide | Users Manual | 504.52 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
user manual I | Users Manual | 3.80 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
user manual II | Users Manual | 5.20 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
user manual III | Users Manual | 4.50 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
|
user manual IV Regulatory Guide | Users Manual | 1.02 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Setup Photos | May 11 2015 / June 11 2015 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Cover Letter(s) |
1 2 3 4 5 | installation guide | Users Manual | 504.52 KiB |
OMNII END-CAP WITH GPS & HSPA+ RADIO KIT INSTALLATION Warning: The installation of any components must be performed using the appropriate anti-static devices. If unavail-
able, discharge static from your body by touching a grounded metallic object before opening any covers on the hand-held. GPS end-cap with antenna attached. Torx T10 screws (x 4) This instruction sheet describes how to install the GPS/HSPA+ Radio Kit and an end-cap kit. The GPS Radio Kit contains the following:
GPS radio with frame Torx T6 screws (x 3) Regulatory label 1004434 The GPS End-cap Kit includes:
The tools listed below are needed for this procedure:
1. Getting the Omnii Ready for GPS/HSPA+ Installation Warning: Always disconnect the Omnii from all power sources (battery & A/C power) before servicing components. Figure 1 Torx T10 screwdriver Torx T6 screwdriver small needle-nose pliers Torx T6 screws (x2) Blanking plate End-Cap Torx T10 screws (x8) Torx T10 End-cap screws (x4) 6 7 3 2 1 4 8 5 Tighten screws in sequence indicated. Remove the battery. Remove the blanking plate (four screws) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. Using a Torx T6 screwdriver, remove the two top-most screws on the front of the unit, just above the display. Remove the eight T10 screws holding the back cover to the main housing. The screws are illustrated in Figure 1. Carefully separate the back cover from the chassis without putting strain on the cables that are still connected. Locate the trigger/speaker cable at the top corner of unit. Grasp the wires in a bundle, and lift them straight up to disconnect the harness from the socket on the main logic board. Carefully disconnect any other cables. Warning: Do not try to pry the harness from the socket, or you may dislocate the socket from the main logic board. Remove the existing end-cap (four screws) using a Torx T10 screwdriver. 2. Installing the GPS/HSPA+ Radio Module Align the 100-pin connector on the GPS radio module with the connector on the main logic board, and press down to attach it. Using a Torx T6 screwdriver, secure the GPS radio to the main logic board with 3 screws (M2x5 mm), torqued to 2.5 in-lb (0.28 N-m). Copyright 2012 by Psion Inc. Psion, the Psion logo, and the names of other products and services provided by Psion are trademarks of Psion Inc. All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners. June 25, 2012 8000274.B Sheet 1 of 1 Figure 2 100-pin connector Torx T6 screws (x3) 3. Attaching the GPS/HSPA+ End-Cap Run the cables (x3) and scanner/imager flex cable through the opening at the top of the expansion back cover. Using a Torx T10 screwdriver and the four screws provided (M3 x 6 mm), secure the GPS end-cap to the expansion back cover. Torque to 5 in-lb (0.56 N-m). GPS bypass cable 4. Reassembling Omnii Before reattaching the back cover, connect the pistol grip trigger/speaker wire harness to socket J11 on the main logic board. Connect the camera flex cable to socket J9 on the main logic board. If a scanner/imager flex cable is present in the end-cap, connect it to socket J13 on the main logic board as shown in Figure 3. If no cable has previously been installed in this socket, there may be a piece of dummy stiffener that must be removed before inserting the cable. Make certain the GPS bypass cable is connected (see Figure 2 on the previous page). Figure 3 Flip latch open Insert cable Flip latch closed J13 J11 J9 Fit the back cover in place against the main housing, ensuring that no cables are caught in the seal. Using a Torx T10 screwdriver, tighten the eight screws (M3x6 mm) to a torque of 5 in-lb (0.56 N-m). Install the screws in the sequence shown in Figure 1 on the previous page to ensure a consistent seal around the opening. Using a Torx T6 screwdriver, replace the two screws (M2x8 mm) above the display on the front of the unit. Torque to 2.5 in-lb (0.28 N-m). Through the scanner pod opening, use small needle-nose pliers to route the grey GPS antenna cable under the two metal cable restraints on the left side of the GPS module. Press the grey GPS antenna connector into the socket labelled GRY on the left side of the unit. Snap it into place. Through the scanner pod opening, use small needle-nose pliers to route the black HSPA+ radio antenna cable under the metal cable restraint at the top of the radio module. Press the black HSPA+ antenna connector into the socket labelled BLK on the radio module. Snap it into place. GPS antenna connector Diversity antenna connector Affix regulatory label here Metal cable restraint HSPA+ antenna connector Press the green diversity cable connector into the socket labelled GRN. Affix regulatory label 1004434. Reattach the blanking plate using a Torx T10 screwdriver and four screws (M3x5 mm) to 5 in-lb (0.56 N-m). Install the battery. COMPANY HEADQUARTERS Psion Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9
+1 905 813 9900 Tel:
Fax:
+1 905 812 6300 SUPPORT SERVICES For local support services, go to:
http://www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm
1 2 3 4 5 | user manual I | Users Manual | 3.80 MiB |
OMNII HAND-HELD COMPUTER User Manual
(Windows Embedded CE 6.0) October 4, 2011 Part No. 8000211.B ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System Regulatory Draft This user manual supports Model Numbers:
7545MBW 7545MBWM 7545MBWP FCC ID: GM37545MBW, GM37545MBWM and GM37545MBWP Copyright 2011 by Psion Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9 http://www.psion.com This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Inc. This document is not to be used, reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of assisting in proper use of Psion manufactured goods and services by their rightful owners and users. Any other use of this docu-
ment is prohibited. Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication. Psion Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the pro-
gram(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages including, but not limited to, consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented. Psion, the Psion logo, and the names of other products and services provided by Psion are trademarks of Psion Inc. Windows and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Psion Inc. is under license. All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners. Regulatory Draft Return-To-Factory Warranty Psion Inc. provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve (12) months in accor-
dance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability provided at:
www.psion.com/warranty The warranty on Psion manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion service organiza-
tion. See Psion terms and conditions of sale for full details. Important:
Psion warranties take effect on the date of shipment. Service and Information Psion provides a complete range of product support services and information to its customers worldwide. Services include technical support and product repairs. To locate your local support services, please go to:
www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm To access further information on current and discontinued products, please go to our Teknet site and log in or tap on Not Registered?, depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet:
http://community.psion.com/support A section of archived product information is also available online:
http://www.psion.com/products Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 About the User Manual . 3 Text Conventions . 4 Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer . 4 Regulatory Labels. 7 Chapter 2: Basic Operation 2.5 2.6 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Omnii Features. 11 Omnii Modules Available. 13 Documents Available . 13 Preparing Omnii for Operation. 14 2.4.1 The Battery. 14 Switching Omnii On and Off . 15 Resetting Omnii . 15 Performing a Warm Reset . 16 2.6.1 2.6.2 Performing a Cold Reset . 16 Performing a Clean Start . 16 2.6.3 Boot to BooSt . 16 2.6.4 2.6.5 Performing a Hard Reset. 16 Attaching Carrying Accessories. 17 2.7 Calibrating the Touchscreen . 17 2.8 2.9 Imager and Scanner Options. 17 2.10 Connectivity . 17 2.11 Data Transfer . 17 2.12 Voice Communication. 17 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Operating System . 21 Battery Details. 21 Battery Safety. 21 3.2.1 3.2.2 Battery Swap Time . 21 3.2.3 Charging the Battery . 21 The Keyboard . 22 3.3.1 Regular Keys . 22 3.3.2 Modifier Keys. 23 Activating Modifier Keys . 24 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys . 24 Function Keys and Macro Keys . 25 3.3.3.1 Function Keys. 25 3.3.3.2 Macro Keys . 25 Numeric KeyboardsAccessing Alpha Keys . 25 3.3.4 3.3.5 The Keypad Backlight . 26 The Display. 26 Adjusting the Display Backlight . 26 3.4.1 3.4.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen. 26 3.3.3 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual i Regulatory Draft Table of Contents 3.7 3.5 3.6 Indicators . 27 LEDs . 27 3.5.1 Battery Charge Status LED . 28 3.5.1.1 Operating System Status LED . 28 3.5.1.2 3.5.1.3 Radio Status LED . 28 3.5.1.4 Scanner Status LED . 28 Onscreen Indicators . 29 3.5.2 Audio Indicators . 30 3.5.3 Vibrations . 30 3.5.4 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . 30 3.6.1 Inserting the Cards . 30 Scanners and Imagers . 31 3.7.1 Basic Scanner Operations . 32 Scanning Techniques. 32 3.7.2 Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . 32 3.7.3 Troubleshooting . 32 3.7.4 3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners. 33 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers. 33 3.7.6 3.8 Windows Embedded CE 6.0 . 33 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . 33 3.8.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen . 34 3.8.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard . 34 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . 34 The Taskbar . 35 3.8.2.1 3.8.2.2 The Start Menu . 36 The PsionVU Desktop Shell . 41 3.9.1 Restoring the Windows Classic Shell . 43 3.10 General Maintenance . 43 3.10.1 Caring for the Touchscreen. 43 3.10.2 Cleaning Omnii. 44 3.8.2 3.8.1 3.9 Chapter 4: Configuration 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Overview of Software. 49 Psion Software Advantage. 49 4.1.1 4.1.2 Microsoft Software . 49 The Control Panel . 49 4.2.1 Control Panel Icons. 50 App Launch Keys. 53 Bluetooth Setup. 54 4.4.1 Paired . 55 Device . 56 4.4.2 Discovering and Removing Devices . 56 4.4.2.1 Filtering By Class of Device (COD). 56 4.4.2.2 4.4.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu. 57 4.4.2.4 Pairing a Device. 57 4.4.3 Servers . 59 4.4.4 Mode . 59 4.4.5 About . 60 4.4.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection . 60 Certificates . 63 ii Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Table of Contents 4.7 4.6 4.8 4.11 4.12 Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . 64 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . 64 4.6.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . 64 4.6.2 4.6.3 Using Windows Mobile Device Center . 65 Display Properties . 65 Background. 65 4.7.1 Appearance. 65 4.7.2 4.7.3 Backlight. 66 Dr. Debug . 66 Status. 67 4.8.1 4.8.2 Settings. 67 4.8.3 Utilities . 68 Error Reporting . 68 4.9 4.10 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . 68 4.10.1 Power . 69 4.10.2 Profiles . 69 4.10.3 Programs. 69 4.10.4 AGPS. 70 4.10.5 Info. 71 Imager & Camera Settings . 71 Input Panel. 72 Keyboard Properties. 73 4.12.1 Key Repeat . 73 4.12.1.1 Keyboard Backlight . 74 4.12.1.2 4.12.1.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes. 75 Keyboard Macro Keys . 75 4.12.1.4 Unicode Mapping . 77 4.12.1.5 Scancode Remapping . 78 4.12.1.6 4.12.1.7 Lock Sequence. 80 4.13 Manage Triggers . 81 4.13.1 Trigger Mappings . 81 4.13.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping. 82 4.14 Microphone . 83 4.15 Open TekTerm . 84 4.16 PartnerUp. 84 4.17 Pocket PC Compatibility . 85 4.18 Power Properties. 85 4.18.1 Battery Capacity. 85 4.18.2 Power Saving Suspend. 86 4.18.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . 87 4.18.4 Advanced . 87 4.18.5 Built-in Devices . 88 4.18.6 Battery Health . 88 4.19 Psion Camera. 90 4.19.1 Using the Camera . 90 4.19.2 Moving Photos to Omnii . 91 4.19.3 Opening a Photo. 91 4.19.4 Deleting a Photo. 92 4.19.5 Using the Video Recorder. 92 4.20 PsionVU Access . 93 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual iii Regulatory Draft Table of Contents 4.20.1 Administrator Password . 93 4.20.2 Shell Settings . 94 4.20.3 Restrictions . 96 4.20.4 Control Panel Settings . 97 4.20.5 Import/Export to File. 97 4.21 Remote Desktop Connection . 98 4.22 Scanners . 98 4.22.1 Barcodes . 99 Scanner . 99 4.22.1.1 4.22.1.2 Restoring Default Settings. 99 4.22.2 Options . 100 4.22.2.1 Double Click Parameters . 101 4.22.2.2 Display Parameters . 101 4.22.2.3 Data Handling . 102 4.22.3 Translations . 102 4.22.3.1 Case Rules. 104 4.22.4 Ports . 104 4.22.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6). 104 4.23 Storage Manager. 106 4.23.1 Formatting a Memory Card . 106 4.23.2 Creating Partitions . 106 4.23.3 Partition Management . 107 4.24 Stylus Properties. 109 4.24.1 Double-Tap . 109 4.24.2 Calibration. 109 4.24.3 Touch . 110 4.25 System Properties . 110 4.26 Total Recall . 111 4.26.1 Creating a Backup Profile. 111 4.26.2 Restoring a Profile. 113 4.26.3 Viewing a Profile. 113 4.26.4 Deleting a Profile . 114 4.27 TweakIt . 114 4.27.1 Advanced. 114 4.27.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings . 114 4.27.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings . 115 4.27.1.3 Advanced Services Settings . 115 4.27.2 User. 116 4.27.2.1 User Display Settings. 116 4.27.3 TweakIt . 116 4.28 Voice Using the Phone Dialer . 116 4.28.1 Dialing a Number . 117 4.28.2 Voice Menu. 117 4.28.3 File Menu Phonebook Management. 119 4.29 Volume & Sounds Properties . 120 4.29.1 Volume Adjustments . 121 4.29.2 Sound Adjustments . 121 4.30 Wi-Fi Config . 121 4.30.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status . 122 4.30.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . 122 iv Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Table of Contents 4.30.2.1 Authentication Mode . 123 4.30.2.2 Encryption. 124 4.30.2.3 EAP . 124 4.30.2.4 Verify Server Certificate . 125 4.30.2.5 Enable OPMK. 125 4.30.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network. 125 4.30.3 Configuring TCP/IP . 126 4.30.3.1 IP Address . 126 4.30.3.2 Name Server . 128 4.30.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . 128 4.30.5 Monitoring the Network Connection. 129 Chapter 5: Accessories 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.5 5.4 Pistol Grips. 133 Removing the Trigger Cover. 133 5.1.1 5.1.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip. 133 Carrying and Protective Accessories . 134 Attaching the Hand Strap - Model ST6025 . 135 5.2.1 Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. 137 5.2.2 5.2.3 Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055. 137 Power Adaptor Options. 137 Snap Modules . 137 5.3.1 AC Wall Adaptor - Model ST1050-1 . 138 5.3.2 5.3.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . 139 Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . 140 Important Charger Safety Instructions. 140 5.4.1 Charging the Battery. 140 5.4.2 5.4.3 InstallationChargers and Docking Stations. 140 5.4.4 Operator Controls . 140 5.4.5 Power Consumption Considerations. 141 Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . 141 Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii . 142 5.5.1 5.5.2 Indicators. 143 Operation . 143 5.5.3 Charging the Omnii Battery. 143 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery. 143 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . 143 Troubleshooting . 144 Docking station does not seem to power on.. 144 5.5.5.1 5.5.5.2 Omnii charge indicator LED stays off.. 144 Omnii charge indicator LED is red. 144 5.5.5.3 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. 144 5.5.5.4 5.5.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. 144 5.6 Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 . 145 Operator Controls . 145 5.6.1 5.6.2 Indicators. 145 5.6.3 Quad Docking Station Operation. 145 Charging the Omnii Battery. 145 Installation. 145 5.6.3.1 5.6.3.2 5.5.4 5.5.5 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual v Regulatory Draft Table of Contents 5.7 5.8 5.6.4 5.6.5 Connecting to the Ethernet Network . 146 5.6.3.3 Cleaning the ST4004 . 146 Troubleshooting . 146 Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. 146 5.6.5.1 5.6.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up. 146 5.6.5.3 Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow. 146 5.6.5.4 Omnii Charge Indicator LED Flashes Red. 147 5.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . 147 Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . 147 5.7.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . 148 5.7.2 Wiring Guidelines . 149 Using the Vehicle Cradle. 149 5.7.3 5.7.4 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. 149 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles . 149 5.7.5 5.7.5.1 Extreme Wet Environments. 149 5.7.6 Powered Cradle Installation . 150 5.7.7 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle. 150 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . 151 5.8.1 Installation . 151 5.8.2 Operator Controls . 151 5.8.3 Charge Indicators. 152 Charging Batteries . 152 5.8.4 Troubleshooting . 152 5.8.5 Improper Battery Storage. 152 5.8.5.1 5.8.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up. 152 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . 152 5.8.5.3 Appendices Appendix A: Port Pinouts Omnii Docking Connector . A-3 A.1 Snap Modules Connectors. A-4 A.2 A.3 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 . A-5 A.4 Omnii Battery Contacts. A-6 Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings B.1 B.2 B.3 Required Applets. D-3 Presets . D-3 Predefined Presets . D-3 B.2.1 B.2.2 Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu). D-3 Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets. D-4 B.2.2.1 B.2.2.2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets. D-4 Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) . D-4 B.2.3 Using the Imagers Applet . D-5 Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) . D-5 B.3.1 Selecting a Camera . D-5 B.3.1.1 B.3.1.2 Setting the Active Preset . D-5 Viewing a Preset . D-6 B.3.1.3 B.3.1.4 Creating a Custom Preset. D-6 vi Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Table of Contents B.3.2 B.3.3 Modifying a Custom Preset . D-6 B.3.1.5 B.3.1.6 Removing a Custom Preset . D-7 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu). D-7 Selecting a Camera . D-8 B.3.2.1 B.3.2.2 Setting the Active Preset . D-8 Viewing a Preset . D-8 B.3.2.3 B.3.2.4 Creating a Custom Preset. D-9 B.3.2.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . D-9 B.3.2.6 Removing a Custom Preset . D-10 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) . D-10 Setting the Active Preset . D-11 B.3.3.1 Viewing a Preset . D-11 B.3.3.2 B.3.3.3 Creating a Custom Preset. D-11 B.3.3.4 Modifying a Custom Preset . D-12 B.3.3.5 Removing a Custom Preset . D-13 Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies. D-13 B.3.4.1 Symbology Settings . D-13 Filter Menu Manipulating Barcode Data . D-13 B.3.5.1 Modifying a Barcode Setting. D-13 Translation Menu Configuring Rules . D-14 Advanced Menu. D-15 File Locations for Captured Images . D-15 B.3.7.1 B.3.7.2 Configuring Triggers. D-15 Barcode Symbologies. D-16 B.4.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies . D-17 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies. D-18 B.4.2 B.3.6 B.3.7 B.3.4 B.3.5 B.4 Appendix C: Scanner Settings C.1 C.2 Barcode Settings . C-3 Scanner Options. C-3 C.1.1 C.1.2 Restoring Default Settings. C-3 Decoded (Internal) Scanners. C-4 Options . C-5 C.2.1 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options. C-5 C.2.2 C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) Data Options. C-6 Decoded (HHP) . C-7 Decoded (Intermec ISCP). C-7 Decoded (ISCP) Options . C-7 C.4.1 C.4.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . C-8 C.5 Non-Decoded Scanners. C-9 Options . C-10 C.3 C.4 C.5.1 Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 SE955 Scanner. D-3 D.1.1 SE955 Decode Zones . D-3 SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner . D-4 D.2.1 SE 1223LR Decode Zone . D-4 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . D-5 D.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones . D-5 SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner . D-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual vii Regulatory Draft Table of Contents D.5 D.6 SE1524ER Decode Zones . D-6 D.4.1 EV15 Imager . D-7 D.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone. D-7 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . D-8 D.6.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances. D-8 EA20X Imager. D-9 D.7.1 EA20X Typical Reading Distances . D-9 D.8 HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder. D-10 HHP 5080 Working Range . D-10 D.8.1 D.7 Appendix E: Omnii Specifications E.1 The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . E-3 E.1.1 Hardware . E-3 E.1.2 Approvals. E-4 E.2 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000). E-5 E.3 Wireless Radios. E-6 Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . E-6 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio. 7 802.11a/b/g/n Radio . 9 Bluetooth Radio. 10 E.3.1 5.8.6 5.8.7 5.8.8 Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings F.1 F.2 F.1.3 F.1.4 Wireless WAN. F-3 Taskbar Icons . F-3 F.1.1 F.1.2 Establishing a Connection . F-3 Disconnecting From a Network. F-4 F.1.2.1 F.1.2.2 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface. F-5 Advanced Information . F-5 F.1.3.1 Entering a PIN Number. F-5 F.1.3.2 Error States . F-5 Tools Menu . F-6 F.1.4.1 Data Configuration . F-6 Security Configuration . F-9 F.1.4.2 Network Configuration . F-9 F.1.4.3 Driver Mode Configuration. F-10 F.1.4.4 F.1.4.5 Modem Information . F-11 F.1.4.6 User Interface . F-11 SMS Menu . F-12 New . F-12 F.1.5.1 F.1.5.2 Inbox . F-12 Outbox . F-13 F.1.5.3 F.1.5.4 SMS Configuration. F-13 F.1.6 Voice. F-13 Power Mode . F-13 F.1.5 Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings G.1 Wireless Information. G-3 G.1.1 Wireless Statistics . G-3 G.1.2 Wireless Information . G-4 Assigning An IP Address . G-6 G.2 viii Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Table of Contents G.3 Name Server . G-6 G.2.1 Advanced Features. G-7 Rearranging Preferred Networks . G-7 G.3.1 Deleting A Preferred Network. G-7 G.3.2 G.3.3 Changing Network Properties. G-7 Index ........................................................................................... I Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual ix Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 INTRODUCTION
. About the User Manual Text Conventions . Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer . Regulatory Labels . 1
. 3
. 4
. 4
. 7 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft 1.1 About the User Manual Chapter 1: Introduction About the User Manual This User Manual describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer. Chapter 1: Introduction provides a basic overview of Omnii. Chapter 2: Basic Operation describes preparing Omnii for operation, including setting up your wireless network. Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii describes Omnii features, including how to charge and maintain the battery, the keyboard features, the display, using the internal scanner, etc. Also describes the Microsoft Win-
dows Embedded CE 6.0 desktop and how to use it, and how to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU Shell. Chapter 4: Configuration describes the Psion Software Advantage and Microsoft programs, and how to use them to configure Omnii, along with scanners/imagers, Bluetooth, and so on. This chapter also intro-
duces you to the PsionVU program, which enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With PsionVU and PsionVU Shell you can greatly enhance your User Experience. Chapter 5: Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Omnii computer. Appendix A: Port Pinouts describes the Omnii pinouts. Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings describes in detail your imagers settings. Appendix C: Scanner Settings details your barcode options. Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications lists the specifications for the Omnii scanners and imagers. Appendix E: Omnii Specifications lists the specifications for your Omnii computer, radios, and battery. Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings describes WWAN configuration information. Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings outlines the steps used to configure your radio using Windows Zero Config. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 3 Regulatory Draft Chapter 1: Introduction Text Conventions 1.2 Text Conventions Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information. Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional infor-
mation that is critical to the operation of the equipment. Warning:
These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss. 1.3 Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a modular, industrial hand-held computer. A variety of options are available to suit applications in courier/delivery, field service, manufacturing facilities, material handling applications in warehouses, ports and yards, with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. Barcode input method-
ologies are supported by a variety of available scanners. Optimization for specific operational environ-
ments is also supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories. Note: Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines. Note: For product specifications, refer to Appendix E: Omnii Specifications. Model Variants Omnii RT15 Hand-Held Computer (rugged) - Model 7545XC Omnii XT15 Hand-Held Computer (extremely rugged) - Model 7545XA Platform Texas Instruments OMAP3 Processor, 800 MHz Flash Memory: configurable from 512 MB to 16 GB RAM 256 MB Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6.0 Internet Explorer 6 Bundled Applications Windows Mobile Device Center Wordpad, ActiveSync Supported Applications Open TekTerm Lockdown Browser Naurtech Browser Mobile Control Centre (MCC) Device Management and Provisioning Wavelink Avalanche Total Recall / Registry Editor / Hermes 4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 1: Introduction Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Interface Colour Touch Display 9.4 cm (3.7 in.) diagonal
- VGA/QVGA, 480 x 640 resolution
- High visibility version: superior sunlight visibility
- High Impact version: withstands 1.25 Joule impact Touchscreen
- Passive stylus or finger operation; pan and flick gestures supported
- Signature capture Keyboards
- Large selection of backlit keypads in both alpha and numeric formats. For a list of currently availa-
ble keyboard configurations, consult your Psion representative, or go to:
- http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld/omniit10_accessories.htm Audio
- Beeper
- Rear speaker (optional)
- Supports walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk over PTT Speaker; VoIP supported over both standard Wi-
Integrated Microphone and PTT Speaker Fi and PTT microphone/speaker. Vibration feedback available to indicate successful barcode scanning in noisy environments. Wireless Communication Integrated 802.11b/g radio (CCX v4 certified) FIPS 140-2 support Internal Wi-Fi antenna Integrated Bluetooth class II, V 2.0 + EDR Optional SIRF III GPS Receiver Note: 802.11b/g and Bluetooth are available simultaneously. The following figures illustrate the main features of Omnii for detailed views, please see Omnii Features on page 11. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 5 Regulatory Draft Chapter 1: Introduction Overview of Omnii Hand-Held Computer Figure 1.1 Omnii RT15 Model with 59-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard Figure 1.2 Bottom View (Docking Connector) Figure 1.3 Top View (Scanner Window) Laser Aperture 6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 1.4 Regulatory Labels Figure 1.4 Laser Warning Label Chapter 1: Introduction Regulatory Labels This label is affixed below the scanner window. Warning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those speci-
fied herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Figure 1.5 LED Radiation Notice Label Thi l b l i ffi d b l th i d Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 7 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft 2 BASIC OPERATION BASIC OPERATION
. 2.4.1 The Battery . 2.5 Switching Omnii On and Off . 2.6 Resetting Omnii
. 2.1 Omnii Features . 2.2 Omnii Modules Available . 2.3 Documents Available . 2.4 Preparing Omnii for Operation. 2.6.1 Performing a Warm Reset . 2.6.2 Performing a Cold Reset . 2.6.3 Performing a Clean Start . 2.6.4 Boot to BooSt . 2.6.5 Performing a Hard Reset . 2.7 Attaching Carrying Accessories . 2.8 Calibrating the Touchscreen . 2.9 Imager and Scanner Options. 2.10 Connectivity . 2.11 Data Transfer . 2.12 Voice Communication . 2
. 11 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 9 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft 2.1 Omnii Features Figure 2.1 Front View of Omnii RT15 Model with Alphanumeric Keyboard Speaker LEDs Chapter 2: Basic Operation Omnii Features Beeper Display Scan Key Microphone Symbol Modifier Key FN Modifier Key ENTER/Power Key Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 11 Regulatory Draft Chapter 2: Basic Operation Omnii Features Figure 2.2 Side Views of Omnii RT15 Right Side Left Side Volume Rocker Button Scan Button Vertical Scroll Button ENTER Button Battery Release Latch Side Rail Slot for Snap Module Arm Figure 2.3 Bottom View 2 1 - Docking Connector 2 - Alignment Pin Holes 3 - M2.5 Locking Screws 3
(for firmly attaching devices) 4 - Hand Strap Slot 4 1 2 3 12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Figure 2.4 Top View Figure 2.5 Back View Rear PTT Speaker
(optional) Scanner Pod Expansion Back Chapter 2: Basic Operation Omnii Modules Available Laser Aperture End-Cap Camera Aperture Scanner Window Pistol Grip Attachment Screws (4) Battery Pack 2.2 Omnii Modules Available To see a current list of Omnii accessories and modules, please go to the Psion website at:
http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld/omniit10_accessories.htm 2.3 Documents Available To see a current list of documents and download what you need, please go to the Knowledge Base on the Psion Ingenuity Working community website:
http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/product-manuals.aspx Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 13 Regulatory Draft Chapter 2: Basic Operation Preparing Omnii for Operation 2.4 2.4.1 Preparing Omnii for Operation The Battery Omnii is powered by a Lithium-ion Smart Battery pack, 5000 mAhModel ST3000. Important: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery safety guide-
lines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide
(PN 8000191). Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information, see Battery Details on page 21. Replacing the Battery Pack Important: Always switch the unit off before changing the battery (see Switching Omnii On and Off on page 15). However, assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 5 minutesyou will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame. Figure 2.6 Omnii Battery 1 2 Battery Top 4 1 Contacts 3 1 - Release Latch 2 - Battery Compartment 3 - Guide Tabs 4 - Latch Tabs 4 3 3 Battery Bottom Note:
If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an uncharged battery and use the device while the battery charges. Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, a battery can be removed for up to 5 minutes without losing data. After 5 minutes the terminal may reboot. Removing the Battery Pack If your unit is equipped with a hand strap, unhook it from the base of the battery. Press the two latch buttons at the sides of the compartment simultaneously, and slide the battery out. Installing the Battery Pack Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit with the contacts match-
ing position and the guide tabs moving into the corresponding slots at the base of the compartment. Click both sides of the battery into place. If your computer is equipped with a hand strap, re-attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery. Switch the unit on (see Switching Omnii On and Off on page 15). 14 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 2.5 Switching Omnii On and Off Follow the instructions below for your Omnii. Chapter 2: Basic Operation Switching Omnii On and Off Press and hold down the [ENTER/Power] key for at least one second. Switching Omnii On When the unit is turned off, normally it automatically enters a power-saving, suspend state. When Omnii is switched on from the suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to turning the computer off. Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C), a non-Psion battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold. See Sus-
pend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on page 87 for details. To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery. However, if you supply AC power to Omnii with a battery that falls below the con-
figured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on. Switching Omnii Off To switch off Omnii, press the [FN] key and then press and release the [ENTER/Power] button. Omnii will automatically enter the Suspend state. Important: Turning off the hand-held does not result in a complete shutdown; rather, the unit enters a power-saving, suspend state. When Omnii is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds. Important: If the word FN is displayed underlined in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked on and Omnii will not switch off. Press the [FN] key twice followed by [ENTER/Power] to switch Omnii off. However, if youve set the mode to Lock (see Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 75), Omnii can be turned off even when the [FN] key is locked on. 2.6 Resetting Omnii To perform a warm or cold reset, you can access the menu by going to Start>Shutdown. Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below. Note:
If your Desktop is switched to the PsionVU Shell (refer to The PsionVU Desktop Shell on page 41), resetting the unit is done solely by use of the keyboard shortcuts. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 15 Regulatory Draft Chapter 2: Basic Operation Performing a Warm Reset 2.6.1 Performing a Warm Reset During a warm reset, running programs are halted. The contents of the flash memory and the registry are preserved. Keep in mind, however, that RAM content is not preserved. Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds. Note: You do not need to reset your Omnii after configuring the radio. 2.6.2 Performing a Cold Reset A cold reset reinitializes all hardware. All RAM including the RAM disk is erased. Non-volatile storage such as the Flash disk is preserved. To execute a cold reset:
Press and hold down the [SYM] key, the [FN] key, and the [ENTER/Power] key, simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds. Note: As part of the normal Windows Embedded CE cold boot process, the screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. The desktop is displayed after a few moments. 2.6.3 Performing a Clean Start A clean start returns Omnii to factory settings, flushes the registry keys and deletes volatile storage. Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [ENTER/Power] button and the [SCAN] key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds. Omnii displays the Boot to BooSt menu.
, type .clean. On an alpha keyboard On a numeric keyboard
, type .25326. 2.6.4 Boot to BooSt If you choose Boot to BooSt, the BooSt menu is loaded. Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [ENTER/Power] button and the [SCAN] key for a minimum of four seconds. Press [1] to launch the OS. 2.6.5 Performing a Hard Reset Important: This procedure is recommended as a last resort, when all other methods fail. To execute a hard reset:
Remove the battery. Using a coin, or other conductive item, connect pins 5 and 6 of the Omnii battery contacts for at least 6 seconds. Pin 6 Pin 5 Replace the battery and power Omnii on. The terminal will boot as if from a cold reset. 16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 2: Basic Operation Attaching Carrying Accessories 2.7 Attaching Carrying Accessories Psion recommends that a carrying accessory a hand strap be installed on Omnii before use. For detailed information, please see Carrying and Protective Accessories on page 134. 2.8 Calibrating the Touchscreen Note: The touchscreen function can be turned off (see Touch on page 110). The Omnii touchscreen feature is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen's operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for correct operation. Refer to Cali-
brating the Touchscreen on page 26 for details. 2.9 Imager and Scanner Options If your Omnii is equipped with an internal imager or scanner, please review the relevant sections:
Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings and Appendix C: Scanner Settings for details. Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications lists their current model numbers, descriptions, and specifications. 2.10 Connectivity For information on connecting Omnii to a PC, please refer to Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC on page 64 Omnii contains an integrated 802.11b/g radio module. The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles. To configure the radio, follow the steps outlined under the heading Wi-Fi Config on page 121. To configure your Bluetooth settings, please go to Bluetooth Setup on page 54. If you have a GPS (Global Positioning System) module, you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem and set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System). See GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings on page 68. To see the radio specifications, please go to Wireless Radios on page E-6. 2.11 Data Transfer Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. Various options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier, Windows Vista , Windows 7 or later. For connection details, please refer to Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC on page 64. 2.12 Voice Communication If either the MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE or the Cinterion PH8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE WWAN radio modem is in-
stalled and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the task-
bar. For details on using your Voice options, please refer to Voice Using the Phone Dialer on page 116. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 17 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft 3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR OMNII 3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR OMNII
. 3.5 Indicators . 3.4 The Display . 3.3 The Keyboard. Function Keys . 3.3.1 Regular Keys . 3.3.3.1 3.3.3.2 Macro Keys . 3.1 Operating System . 3.2 Battery Details . 3.2.1 Battery Safety . 3.2.2 Battery Swap Time. 3.2.3 Charging the Battery . 21
. 21
. 21
. 21
. 21
. 22
. 22 3.3.2.1 Activating Modifier Keys. 24 3.3.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys . 24 3.3.2 Modifier Keys . 23 3.3.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys. 25
. 25
. 25 3.3.4 Numeric KeyboardsAccessing Alpha Keys . 25
. 26 3.3.5 The Keypad Backlight . 26 3.4.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight . 26
. 3.4.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . 26
. 27
. 27 3.5.1 LEDs . 3.5.1.1 Battery Charge Status LED . 28 3.5.1.2 Operating System Status LED . 28 3.5.1.3 Radio Status LED . 28 3.5.1.4 Scanner Status LED . 28
. 29
. 30 3.6 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card . 30
. 30
. 31
. 32 3.7.1
. 32 3.7.2 Scanning Techniques . 3.7.3 Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations . 32 3.7.4 Troubleshooting . 32 3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . 33 3.7.6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . 33
. 33 3.8.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . 33 3.8.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen . 34 3.8.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard. 34 3.8.2 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . 34
. 35
. 36
. 41 3.9.1 Restoring the Windows Classic Shell . 43
. 43
. Basic Scanner Operations . 3.8.2.1 The Taskbar . 3.8.2.2 The Start Menu . 3.5.2 Onscreen Indicators . 3.5.3 Audio Indicators . Inserting the Cards . 3.8 Windows Embedded CE 6.0 . 3.9 The PsionVU Desktop Shell. 3.10 General Maintenance . 3.7 Scanners and Imagers. 3.6.1
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 19 Regulatory Draft 3.10.1 Caring for the Touchscreen . 3.10.2 Cleaning Omnii . 43
. 44 20 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Operating System 3.1 Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6.0 3.2 Battery Details Omnii Hand-Held Computers operate by lithium-ion battery packs, Model ST3000. Please see the following sections for detailed battery information:
Installation: Preparing Omnii for Operation on page 14. Calibration and power settings: Power Properties on page 85. Chargers and docking stations: Chapter 5: Accessories. Specifications: Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000) on page E-5. Contact pinout: Omnii Battery Contacts on page A-6. 3.2.1 Battery Safety Important: Before attempting to install, use, or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000191. 3.2.2 Battery Swap Time Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 5 minutesyou will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame. To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the Flash Disk partition of the file system. Refer to Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on page 87 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes. The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the battery capac-
ity at which Omnii will be shut down. If left at the default value, Maximum Operating Time, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, Omnii shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time. Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C), a non-Psion battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold. See Sus-
pend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup on page 87 for details. To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery. However, if you supply AC power to Omnii with a battery that falls below the con-
figured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on. 3.2.3 Charging the Battery Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information on these accessories, please see Chapter 5: Accessories. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 21 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Keyboard Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity. Table 3.1 Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times
% Charge Completed During Sleep Mode While Operating 100%
75%
4 hrs. 2 hrs. 8 hrs. 6 hrs. Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). 3.3 The Keyboard Omnii offers a wide variety of Alpha and Numeric keyboard layouts. See http://www.psion.com/us/prod-
ucts/handheld/omniit10_accessories.htm for a list of available configurations. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, those differences are described in the following sections. Omnii is equipped with an [Enter/Power] key that allows you to switch the unit on and to shut down the unit to Suspend or Standby mode. For details refer to Switching Omnii On and Off on page 15. There are a number of modifier keys that provide access to additional keys and system functions, as de-
scribed in Modifier Keys on page 23. Figure 3.1 Keyboard Layouts
[SYM] Modifier Key
[SCAN] Key
[FN] Modifier Key
[ENTER/Power] Key
[SHIFT] Modifier Key
[Windows] Key 36-KEY Numeric 123 Keyboard 59-KEY Alpha ABC Keyboard 3.3.1 Regular Keys The [ENTER/Power] Key The [ENTER/Power] key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions as well as to power the unit on and off (for details refer to Switching Omnii On and Off on page 15). 22 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Modifier Keys The [SHIFT] Key The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and functions on the numeric keyboards. Press the [SHIFT] key to turn the shift state 'on' (it will be represented by an up arrow in the taskbar), then press another key to access the shifted function of that key. Press the [SHIFT] key twice to lock the shift state on (the up arrow in the taskbar will be underlined). Press
[SHIFT] again to turn the shift state off. To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off. The Arrow Keys The [Arrow] keys are located near the top of the keyboard, and are represented on the keyboard as trian-
gles pointing in different directions. The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down, left and right. The left arrow key should not be confused with the [BACKSPACE] key which is depicted as a left arrow. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear. The [BACKSPACE/DEL] Key The [BACKSPACE] key (represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left) moves the cursor one char-
acter to the left, erasing the previous key stroke. The [DEL] key ([FN] +[BACKSPACE]) erases the character at the current cursor position. The [CTRL] and [ALT] Key The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent. Pressing either key twice locks it 'on' (it appears underlined on the Taskbar). Pressing the key once again unlocks it. The [TAB] Key Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward. The [ESC] Key Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box, or activity. The [SPACE] Key The [SPACE] key is represented on the keyboard by a long, low horizontal line contained by a small vertical line on each side. Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox. The [SCAN] Key Omnii is equipped with a single [SCAN] key on the keyboard and an extra [SCAN] button located on the left side of the unit. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions. 3.3.2 Modifier Keys The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next key pressed. The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded
(two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
[SHIFT] and [FN]
The [SHIFT] and [FN] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions. The functions related to these modifier keys are colour-coded in white and blue print respectively above the keyboard keys, dependant on your keyboard format. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 23 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Modifier Keys
[SYM]
Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (P/N 8100016), note that the [SYM]
key is interchangeable with the [ORANGE] key. The Symbol [SYM] modifier key is represented on the keyboard by the characters SYM and provides access to commonly used symbolic characters. Pressing the key brings up the Symbol soft input panel (SIP) onscreen keyboard, with symbols mapped to each key. If you wish to adjust the settings for the pop-up screen (e.g. time of delay before screen appears, etc.), modify the file softinputpanel.xml, located in the Windows folder. Note: Modifier keys are remapped in the Control Panel, and the Symbol SIP will automatically show and use the new mappings after the next reboot. The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your Omniieither numeric or alphanu-
meric. Figure 3.2 Symbol Soft Input Panels Internet Browser Keys
[SPACE] Key 36-KEY Numeric Keyboard 59-KEY Alpha Keyboard 3.3.2.1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed, it is shown in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether a modifier key is active. For example, if the [CTRL] key is pressed, Ctrl is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disap-
pears from the taskbar. 3.3.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is locked on. A locked modifier key is displayed in underlined letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [FN] key twice locks it onit is displayed as an underlined blue FN in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen. The same is true of the [SYM] key, which is shown as an underlined orange SYM in the taskbar. The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off. Once a mod-
ifier key is unlocked, the underline representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed. Note: The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a key once will lock the key on. If you disable the One Shot function of the key, pressing it once will lock the key on. Press-
ing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it off. Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 75 for details. 24 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Function Keys and Macro Keys 3.3.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see The Keyboard on page 22), Omnii supports function keys and macro keys. All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application. The Open TekTerm applica-
tion utilizes these keys (for detailed information, see the Open TekTerm Software User Manual, P/N 8000073). 3.3.3.1 Function Keys Function keys perform special, custom-defined functions within an application. These keys are accessed by pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard, or through the appropriate [SHIFT] or [FN]
key sequence, depending on the keyboard variant being used. Alphanumeric Keyboard Function Keys The Alphanumeric keyboards are equipped with up to thirty function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in blue print above the alpha keys or function keys (depending on your keyboard). To access the blue function keys, press the [FN] key followed by the appropriate alpha or function key. Function keys [F1] through [F24] can be used with the Windows Embedded CE operating system or another application. The additional function keys, [F25] through [F30] along with the macros, are not used as part of the Windows Embedded CE operating system. Numeric Keyboard Function Keys The Numeric keyboards are equipped with up to 24 function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in white print above the function keys. Function keys F25 through F30 can only be accessed by remapping another key to that function. To access the white function keys, press the [SHIFT] key followed by the appropriate function key. 3.3.3.2 Macro Keys Important: Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 75 for details about creating macros. Several of the Omnii keyboards are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the [ENTER/Power] key, the [BACKSPACE] key, any function key and arrow key, etc. 59-Key Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys These keyboards have six macro keys: [M1] to [M6], located on the S to X keys (second-last row of keys). To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key. 36-Key Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys These keyboards are equipped with five macro keys: [M1] to [M5]. These keys are colour coded in blue print above function keys [F1] to [F5]. To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key. Numeric KeyboardsAccessing Alpha Keys On the Numeric Omnii keyboards, all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above the keys. Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the [FN] modifier key, then pressing another key on the keyboard. The Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboard has each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single [FN]-
shifted character on individual keys. An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently se-
lected character. The Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone-style alphabetic keys, with the blue alphabetic characters located in groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys. To access characters on these keyboards, a few extra steps are needed, as described below. 3.3.4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 25 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Keypad Backlight Choosing a Single Alpha Character Note: The following examples assume that the [FN] key is enabled as Lock mode in the One Shot screen (accessible through the Control Panel Keyboard icon). In Lock mode, pressing the
[FN] key once locks it on. Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 75 for details. Press the [FN] key, and press the numeric key [2]. Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off. The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in blue characters above the numeric key [2]. The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar as you press the numeric key, provid-
ing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen. To choose the letter a:
To choose the letter b:
To choose the letter c:
Press the [FN] key, and press [2] twice. Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off. Press the [FN] key, and press [2] three times. Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off. Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key. If you pause longer than one second between key presses, the alphabetic character that is displayed at that time will be entered. Selecting Uppercase Letters To display a single capital letter, press the [SHIFT] key first, then the letter you want. To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] + [SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off. 3.3.5 The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be con-
figured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows Embedded CE Control Panel. The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box. Refer to Keyboard Backlight on page 74 for details about this option. Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only. 3.4 The Display Omnii is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The back-
light switches on when a key is pressed. 3.4.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight The behaviour of the display backlight and the intensity of the backlight can be specified in the Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel. Note: Refer to Backlight on page 66 for details about the Display Properties dialog box. 3.4.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen If your Omnii touchscreen has never been calibrated, or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control Panel to recalibrate the screen. In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window. 26 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Indicators Select the Calibration tab, and then choose the Recalibrate button. Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen. 3.5 Indicators Omnii uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages, vibrations, and audio tones as indicators. 3.5.1 LEDs Omnii is equipped with four coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these LEDs indicate. Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission. Figure 3.3 LED Status Indicators 1 2 3 4 1. Battery Charge Status 2. Operating System Status 3. GPS Status 4. Scanner Status Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 27 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii LEDs 3.5.1.1 Battery Charge Status LED The far left LED is reserved for battery charge status. This indicator is active even when the hand-held is in-
serted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily. Table 3.2 Battery Charge LED Behaviours Charge LED Behaviour Function OFF Solid Green Flashing Green Yellow Solid Red External power not detected. Battery charging complete. Charge in progress. Cell temperature out of range for charge. Unable to charge battery. 3.5.1.2 Operating System Status LED The second LED indicates system notifications and operating system status. It is also available for user-
loaded custom Windows Embedded CE applications. Table 3.3 Operating LED Behaviour Function OFF when unit is in Suspend or Shutdown. Normal operating status. Solid Yellow Fast Flashing Yellow Flashing Yellow The unit is powering on. The unit is in Standby mode. This LED is controlled by the Sounds and Notifications Control Panel applet. 3.5.1.3 Radio Status LED The third LED from the left indicates the status of the GPS radio in Omnii. Table 3.4 Radio Traffic LED Behaviour Function OFF Slow Flashing Blue The GPS radio is disabled. The GPS radio is enabled and active. 3.5.1.4 Scanner Status LED The fourth (far right) LED indicates scanner status. Table 3.5 Scan LED Behaviour Function OFF Solid Red during scan Solid Green after decode OFF when scan ended Flashing Red The scanner is not in use. Scan in progress. Successful scan. Unsuccessful scan. 28 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Onscreen Indicators 3.5.2 Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators, including the Input Panel button if you have chosen to show that option in the Taskbar and Start Menu settings. Figure 3.4 Taskbar The taskbar changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your Omnii, the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar. Windows Start Button If you are using the touchscreen, you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen, or press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu, and then tap on the desired application. Modifier Key Indicators
[SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar, for ex-
ample, pressing the [FN] key once displays FN in the taskbar. If a modifier key is pressed twice, it is locked on and the onscreen indicator is displayed with underlined letters in the taskbar, for example, pressing [FN]
twice displays FN in the taskbar. Power The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides quick access to the charge state of the battery. Tapping on the icon once will show the percentage charge left in the battery. Tapping on the icon twice opens the Power Properties menus (see Power Properties on page 85), where you can set the low battery warnings levels, and time to enter Suspend. If Omnii is using external AC power, an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar. 802.11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon. Good Reception Weak Reception No Radio Link Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 29 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Audio Indicators Docking Device When a hand-held is inserted in a docking station, charger or cradle, an associated icon appears in the taskbar. Combo Charger &
Quad Docking Station Powered Vehicle Cradle, Desktop Dock Combo Docking Station
& Snap Module Bluetooth Radio This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio. Input Panel You can tap the Input Panel icon to activate the soft keyboard application. 3.5.3 Audio Indicators Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and .wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver. The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operators entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low. The volume rocker button is located on the left side of the hand-held. Information on configuring sounds is detailed in Volume & Sounds Properties on page 120. 3.5.4 Vibrations You can set Omnii to vibrate when a successful or unsuccessful barcode scan is performed. See Scanners, page 98. 3.6 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card There are two slots available in the battery compartmentthe lower slot is provided for a microSD (Secure Digital) card, which provides additional non-volatile memory to your Omnii, and the upper slot is for a SIM
(Subscriber Identity Module) card, which allows access to the Voice option, access to the Internet, and so on. SD Cover microSD Card Slot O P E N L O C K SIM Card Slot 3.6.1 Inserting the Cards For a microSD card:
Switch off the power to Omnii. Remove the battery. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the SD cover screw. Flip the cover open or remove it. Slide the microSD card door to the left to unlock it. Flip it open. 30 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Scanners and Imagers Slide the microSD card into the guides on the SD card door. Close the microSD card door, and slide it to the right to lock it. icro M For a SIM card:
Slide the SIM card metal door latch to the right to unlock it, then flip the door open. Slide the card into the guides on the SIM card door. Swing the hinged door back down into place, and slide the metal door latch to the left to lock it. L O C K O P E N 3.7 Scanners and Imagers Important: It is critical that you review the Laser Warnings in the Omnii Hand-Held Compu-
ter Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) before using any of the scanners described in this chapter. For detailed scanner specifications and decode zone tables, refer to Appendix D:
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications . Note: To enable a newly-installed imager or scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. Omnii supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements. Refer to the following sections for detailed information:
Scanner list and specifications: Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications . Configuration: Scanners on page 98 and Manage Triggers on page 81. Scanning Techniques on page 32 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan. Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations on page 32 details how to interpret whether or not a barcode has been successfully scanned. Barcode Parameters: Appendix C: Scanner Settings. Imager Settings: Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings. Troubleshooting on page 32 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail. Long Range: reads large 1D barcodes (55 mil) at long distances (up to 3m). Standard Range/High Performance: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m). Extended Range: reads regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at short to medium distances (1m), as well as large 1D barcodes (e.g. 55 mil) at long distances. Fuzzy Logic: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m). Scanner types include:
Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 31 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Basic Scanner Operations 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 PDF Raster Laser: reads 2D PDF barcodes or damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m). 1D Imager: reads regular 1D and PDF417 barcodes at short to medium distances. Basic Scanner Operations Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed. Scanning Techniques Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the barcode. Do not hold the scanner directly over the barcode. In this position, light can reflect back into the scan-
ners exit window and prevent a successful decode. Scan the entire barcode. If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner, make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the barcode, including the margins on either end of the symbol. If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within the barcode you want to scan. When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the barcode. Movement blurs the image. Hold the scanner farther away for larger barcodes. Hold the scanner closer for barcodes with bars that are close together. Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour. Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended. Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red. Scanner Status LED, Sounds, and Vibrations The scanner LED (the far right LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The LED behaves as follows:
A barcode icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable the Scan Indicator pa-
rameter in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu. When the scan is successful, the barcode data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol trig-
ger) is released, but only if the Scan Result parameter is turned on in the Control Panel>Scanners>Op-
tions>Display menu. You can also enable sounds and vibrations to indicate good and bad scans by enabling those options in the Control Panel>Scanners>Options>Display menu. Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
Is the unit on?
Check that the barcode symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the barcode. Check the barcode to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different barcode to verify that the problem is not with the barcode. Check that the barcode is within the proper range. Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the hand-held. Is the laser beam scanning across the barcode?
Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging. 32 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners 3.7.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning begins. Refer to Dot Time (msec) on page -5 for details. Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immedi-
ate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and high visibility internal scanners. Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed. 3.7.6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single barcode or multiple barcodes (at one time). It can find a barcode regardless of its orientationthat is, even a barcode printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand-held will be decoded successfully. Note: When scanning multiple barcodes, ensure that all of the desired barcodes are within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all barcodes are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded barcodes are passed to the application program. The application program then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing barcodes. When scanning a single barcode, ensure that only the desired barcode is within the field of view of the scanner. Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of barcodes being scanned. Although the imager in-
cludes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the barcodes, especially if the barcode is far from the hand-held. Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated barcodes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the barcode to the side or top, or angle the barcode so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner. Most imagers take several snap shots of the barcode in order to decode it. It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance. Turn the hand-held computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained. When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the fieldeither in the centre of the barcode you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple barcodes are to be scanned. The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the barcode is taken. Windows Embedded CE 6.0 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded CE for portable devices and desktop Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize point and click navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every point and click action. Windows Embedded CE supports the same point and click user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one differencethe point and click action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touch-
3.8 3.8.1 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 33 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop screen tapping. In those applications that support it, you can also flick and pan your finger to scroll through screens. 3.8.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen Note:
If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen may need recalibration. Refer to Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 26. Omnii comes equipped with a stylusa pointing tool that looks like a pen. The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen. You can also use gestures with your fingers. You can use two gestures: pan and flick. Use left or right flicks to quickly move between tabs of a multi-tab control panel, or to scroll long lists of op-
tions. Use panning by touching and dragging a page that has scrollbars. Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only a finger touch or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii. To choose an icon, open a file, launch an applet or open a folder:
Double-tap on the appropriate icon. 3.8.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard If you would like to use keyed input to choose icons and navigating dialog boxes, displaying the desktop you can refer to Table 3.6 for a description of the navigation keys. Table 3.6 Keyboard Navigation Operation Key or Key Combination Switch between active applications Open task manager Move the cursor Open file, folder or icon Exit & Save Close/Exit & Do Not Save Navigate Dialog Boxes
[ALT] [TAB]
[ALT] [ESC]
Arrow keys
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[ESC]
[TAB]
To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB]
To display the contents of the next tab in a dialog box
[CTRL] [TAB]
Select Radio Button/Press Button Go to Start Menu
[SPACE]
[Windows]
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, Omnii does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence. 3.8.2 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop When Omnii boots up, the default startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately. Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp. 34 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Figure 3.5 Omnii Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop To access desktop icons:
On the keyboard:
Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch an application. Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press [ENTER] to launch the highlighted icon. Note:
If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons, the desktop may not be selected. Press
[Windows] to display the Start Menu, and select Desktop. Now the desktop will be in focus and the arrow keys will highlight the icons. 3.8.2.1 The Taskbar Omnii is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a charger, cradle, docking station, or Snap Module, an associated icon is displayed. In addition, the taskbar displays the appli-
cation(s) currently running on your unit. The taskbar also displays active modifier keys: [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [FN] and [SYM]. Keys that have been locked on are displayed with underlined letters. For example, if you have set the [CTRL] key lock to on in Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 35 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop the Keyboard menu and you press the key, it is displayed as an underlined Ctrl in the taskbar. (For detailed information on modifier keys and keyboard options, see The Keyboard on page 22). 3.8.2.1.1 Using the Taskbar A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted. The tooltip provides the status of each icon. If youre using the touchscreen:
Tap and hold on an icon to display the icon's tooltip. Double-tap the icon to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon. For example, double-tap the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information. On the keyboard:
Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu. Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu, and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-
menu. Choose System Tray in the sub-menu. Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which youd like more information. Press [ENTER] to display the appropriate dialog box. 3.8.2.1.2 Customizing the Taskbar In the Start Menu, choose Settings, and then Taskbar. To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require:
If youre using the keyboard:
The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed. Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu. Highlight the Settings option, highlight Taskbar in the sub-menu, and press [ENTER]. Tap on the items you want to activate or deactivate. The check mark indicates active items. If youre using the keyboard:
Highlight the options you want to activate, and press the [SPACE] key to select them. A check mark indicates active items. 3.8.2.2 The Start Menu The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application. To display the menu, tap on the Start Menu. 36 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop Note: Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work. Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press [ENTER], or If youre using the keyboard:
If the menu item has an underlined character:
Type the underlined alpha character. For example, to display the Run dialog box, type the letter r. 3.8.2.2.1 Programs Choose Programs to display a sub-menu of options. The programs displayed will be those resident in the Windows\Programs folder of the computer. Figure 3.6 Program Sub-Menu This sub-menu allows you to choose Command Prompt, Internet Explorer, installed applications (e.g., Micro-
soft WordPad), PsionVU Access, Remote Desktop Connection, Wi-Fi Config, or Windows Explorer. Demo This folder contains the Scanner Demo, Demo Signature and Demo Sound applications. Scanner Demo can be used to test how the hand-held reads and writes barcodes. Demo Signature allows you to capture a sig-
nature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file. Demo Sound allows you to record and playback sound files. The Sample Rate and the Bits Per Sample are the rates at which the sound will be Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 37 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop recorded. Sounds recorded at the higher sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality sound but will require more file storage space. Lower sample rates and/or bits per sample produces a smaller file, but the sound quality suffers. The record and play buttons operate the same as any recording device. The X icon deletes the sound and the diskette icon allows you to save your sound. Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type DOS com-
mands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive. Internet Explorer Omnii is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows Embedded CE. You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings>Control Panel or by double-tapping on the desktop icon My Device and then, double-tapping on the Control Panel icon. Microsoft WordPad WordPad is a basic word processor used to create, edit, and print .rtf, .doc, and .txt files. PsionVU Access PsionVU Access allows you to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from the default Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU shell. Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the hand-held (Windows Embedded CE device). Remote Desktop Connection on page 98 provides a website with details about this option. Wi-Fi Config The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11b/g radio for one or more wireless network profiles. Windows Explorer The Windows Explorer installed on your Omnii is consistent with all Windows Embedded CE devices. 3.8.2.2.2 Shortcuts Figure 3.7 Shortcuts Sub-Menu System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon. These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information. Choose Shortcuts>System Tray. 38 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the dialog box attached to an icon:
Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon, for example, the Bluetooth icon. Press [ENTER] to display the Bluetooth menus. Cycle Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through active applications. To cycle through your active applications:
Choose Shortcuts>Cycle Tasks, or Press [ALT] [TAB]. Task Manager The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display the task manager window:
Tap on Shortcuts>Task Manager Press [ALT] [ESC].
, or 3.8.2.2.3 Settings The Settings sub-menu includes the following settings: Control Panel, Network and Dial-up Connections and Taskbar and Start Menu. Figure 3.8 Settings Sub-Menu Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 39 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and the shell. If your Omnii is running with the Psion Open TekTerm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel. Network and Dial-Up Connections The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure the Omnii network interfaces or execute an existing configuration. Refer to Connectivity on page 17 for radio setup details. Taskbar and Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the taskbar, choosing which options will be displayed. Refer to Customizing the Taskbar on page 36 for additional details about this option. 3.8.2.2.4 Run Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch. 3.8.2.2.5 Shutdown The Shutdown menu includes these options: Suspend, Warm Reset and Cold Reset. Suspend The Suspend option suspends Omnii immediately. This is equivalent to turning the hand-held off. Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the hand-held, leaving all saved files and registry settings intact. Any unsaved data is lost. 40 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The PsionVU Desktop Shell Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets the hand-held (see page 16). Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost; however, the registry settings are saved. 3.9 The PsionVU Desktop Shell The appearance and actions of the desktop can be changed by tapping on the PsionVU Shell icon on your desktop, which activates the PsionVU shell. Note: Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells. Figure 3.9 Switch to PsionVU Shell After resetting the Omnii, the desktop appearance will be very different. The programs are accessed with finger (or stylus) taps and swipes. If there are more applications than shown on one screen, a white ani-
mated dot will be present on the side of the screen in the direction of the next set of icons. Swiping the screen to that direction will move the display to the next screen. Note: Although the Desktop appearance defaults to the Ingenuity theme, the theme is not changed using the PsionVU Shell icon. To change themes, open the Shell Settings>Advanced menu in PsionVU Access (see Shell Settings on page 94). Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 41 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii The PsionVU Desktop Shell Hold the stylus or your finger on the Active Tasks, Favourites, or Notifications Bar, and swipe to the left or right to switch to the next screen. Active Tasks Bar Favourites Bar Notifications Bar A different program, PsionVU Access, enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details see PsionVU Access on page 93. To change your Desktop background, refer to Shell Settings on page 94. Active Tasks Bar Open applications are shown in the top barthe most recently opened is the first icon on the left. Tapping once on a program icon will maximize the application. This feature replaces the Task Manager of the Windows Classic Shell. Date/Time Bar Tapping once on the date or time will open the Date/Time Properties settings to enable you to change your settings and time zone. Favourites Bar The Favourites Bar replaces the Windows Classic Shells Desktop and Start Menu. These icons are the program shortcuts from your Windows>Start Menu. Tapping once will open the program. If you tap and hold on an icon, the application name is displayed. Notifications Bar This bar shows the run-time program notifications for Battery, Volume, Wi-Fi, Phone or GPRS, and other no-
tifications for the programs you are running. This feature replaces the Taskbar of the Windows Classic Shell. Desktop Minimized View When an application is opened and maximized, the desktop view is minimized and the Notifications Bar is shown at the bottom of the screen. Tapping anywhere on the Notifications Bar (except on the SIP) will restore the PsionVU desktop. Note:
In order to use the SIP, turn on the automatic settings in Control Panel>Input Panel. PsionVU Access The PsionVU Access program allows you to open a different program, PsionVU, which enables you to cus-
tomize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details 42 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Restoring the Windows Classic Shell see PsionVU Access on page 93. To change your Desktop background, refer to Shell Settings on page 94. To open PsionVU:
Tap on the PsionVU Access icon in the Favourites Bar. 3.9.1 Restoring the Windows Classic Shell The default Desktop appearance and actions can be restored by tapping on the PsionVU Shell icon in the Favourites Bar. Figure 3.10 Shell Switch to Windows Classic Shell Desktop Note: Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells. 3.10 General Maintenance 3.10.1 Caring for the Touchscreen The touchscreen is covered with a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal con-
ductive coating. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
mustard ketchup sodium hydroxide concentrated caustic solutions benzyl alcohol concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (ST6112). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 43 Regulatory Draft Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii Cleaning Omnii 3.10.2 Cleaning Omnii Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only your finger or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii. Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. Omnii has a plastic case that is sus-
ceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions. To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol. 44 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft
1 2 3 4 5 | user manual II | Users Manual | 5.20 MiB |
4 CONFIGURATION 4 CONFIGURATION
. 4.1
. 4.2 4.2.1
. The Control Panel. Overview of Software . 4.1.1 4.1.2 Microsoft Software . Control Panel Icons . Psion Software Advantage. 49
. 49
. 49
. 49
. 50
. 53 4.3 App Launch Keys . 54 4.4 Bluetooth Setup . 55
. 4.4.1 Paired . 56 4.4.2 Device. 4.4.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices . 56 4.4.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD). 56 4.4.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu . 57
. 57 4.4.2.4 Pairing a Device . 4.4.3 Servers . 59
. 4.4.4 Mode . 59
. 4.4.5 About . 60 4.4.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection. 60 4.5 Certificates . 63 4.6 Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . 64 4.6.2 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . 64 4.6.3 Using Windows Mobile Device Center . 65
. 122 4.30.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status . 122 4.30.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . 4.30.3 Configuring TCP/IP . 126
. 128 4.30.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . 65
. 65
. 65
. 66
. 66
. 67
. 67
. 68
. 4.9
. 68 4.10 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings. 68
. 69
. 69
. 69
. 70
. 71
. 71
. 72
. 73 4.12.1.1
. 73 4.12.1.2 Keyboard Backlight . 74
. 4.12.1 Keyboard Properties . Key Repeat . Imager & Camera Settings . Background . 4.7.1 4.7.2 Appearance . 4.7.3 Backlight . 4.10.1 Power . 4.10.2 Profiles . 4.10.3 Programs . 4.10.4 AGPS . 4.10.5 Info . 4.8.1 4.8.2 Settings. 4.8.3 Utilities . 4.11 4.12 Input Panel Display Properties . Error Reporting . 4.8 Dr. Debug. Status . 4.7
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 45 Regulatory Draft 4.19 Psion Camera . 4.20 PsionVU Access . 4.13 Manage Triggers . 4.14 Microphone . 4.15 Open TekTerm. 4.16 PartnerUp . 4.17 Pocket PC Compatibility . 4.18 Power Properties . 4.19.1 Using the Camera . 4.19.2 Moving Photos to Omnii . 4.19.3 Opening a Photo. 4.19.4 Deleting a Photo. 4.19.5 Using the Video Recorder . 4.12.1.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes . 75 4.12.1.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . 75 4.12.1.5 Unicode Mapping . 77 4.12.1.6 Scancode Remapping . 78 4.12.1.7
. 80 Lock Sequence . 81
. 83
. 84
. 84
. 85
. 85
. 85
. 4.18.1 Battery Capacity. 86 4.18.2 Power Saving Suspend . 4.18.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . 87
. 87 4.18.4 Advanced . 88 4.18.5 Built-in Devices . 4.18.6 Battery Health . 88
. 90
. 90
. 91
. 91
. 92
. 92
. 93
. 93
. 94
. 96
. 97
. 97
. 98
. 98
. 99 4.22.1.1
. 99 4.22.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . 99 100 4.22.2.1 Double Click Parameters . 101 4.22.2.2 Display Parameters . 101
. 4.22.2.3 Data Handling . 102
. 102
. 104 104
. 4.22.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6). 104
. 106
. 106
. 106
. 107
. 109
. 109
. 109
. 110
. 4.20.1 Administrator Password . 4.20.2 Shell Settings . 4.20.3 Restrictions . 4.20.4 Control Panel Settings . 4.20.5 Import/Export to File . 4.23.1 Formatting a Memory Card . 4.23.2 Creating Partitions . 4.23.3 Partition Management . 4.24.1 Double-Tap . 4.24.2 Calibration . 4.24.3 Touch . 4.22.3.1 Case Rules . Scanner . 4.22.3 Translations . 4.22.2 Options . 4.22.4 Ports . 4.21 Remote Desktop Connection . 4.22 Scanners . 4.22.1 Barcodes . 4.23 Storage Manager . 4.24 Stylus Properties . 46 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 4.27 TweakIt . 4.25 System Properties . 4.26 Total Recall
. 4.28 Voice Using the Phone Dialer . 4.29 Volume & Sounds Properties . 4.27.2 User . 4.27.3 TweakIt . 4.27.1 Advanced. 110
. 111
. 111 4.26.1 Creating a Backup Profile . 113
. 4.26.2 Restoring a Profile . 113 4.26.3 Viewing a Profile . 114
. 4.26.4 Deleting a Profile . 4.13.1 Trigger Mappings . 81
. 4.13.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping. 82
. 114
. 114
. 4.27.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings . 114 4.27.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings. 115 4.27.1.3 Advanced Services Settings . 115
. 116 4.27.2.1 User Display Settings . 116
. 116
. 116
. 117 4.28.1 Dialing a Number . 4.28.2 Voice Menu. 117
. 4.28.3 File Menu Phonebook Management . 119
. 120
. 121
. 121
. 121
. 122
. 122 4.30.2.1 Authentication Mode . 123 4.30.2.2 Encryption . 124 4.30.2.3 EAP . 124 4.30.2.4 Verify Server Certificate . 125
. 125 4.30.2.5 Enable OPMK. 4.30.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network . 125
. 126
. 126
. 4.30.3.1
. 128
. 4.30.3.2 Name Server . 128 4.30.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced . 4.30.5 Monitoring the Network Connection . 129
. 4.29.1 Volume Adjustments . 4.29.2 Sound Adjustments . 4.30.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status . 4.30.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure . IP Address . 4.30.3 Configuring TCP/IP . 4.30 Wi-Fi Config . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 47 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Overview of Software 4.1 4.1.1 Overview of Software Psion Software Advantage Psion Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system adminis-
trators and end users. These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maximize productivity. AGPS App Launch Keys Battery Health Bluetooth Manager Compass Dr. Debug PartnerUp Psion A.R.C. Client Psion Camera PsionVu TweakIt Scanner Total Recall Manage Triggers WiFi Config 4.1.2 Microsoft Software Windows CE 6.0 R3 is a 32-bit, real-time, multitasking Operating System. The OS features a small footprint, with compatibility to port existing Win32 applications and Touch & Gesture support. Some of the major WCE 6.0 R3 components are:
Flash Lite Internet Explorer Embedded Microsoft WordPad Remote Desktop Connection Windows Explorer 4.2 The Control Panel The Windows Embedded CE Control Panel provides a group of applications through which you can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration and the desktop color scheme. When Omnii boots up, the startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately. To access the Control Panel:
If youre using the keyboard:
The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your Omnii. Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu. Highlight Settings in Start Menu, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to highlight the Control Panel. Press the [ENTER] key. Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu. Tap on Settings
>Control Panel. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 49 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Icons Figure 4.1 Control Panel Icons 4.2.1 Control Panel Icons The Control Panel provides a group of applications that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your Omnii. This section shows the related icons in the Control Panel and gives a brief description of each. App Launch Keys By mapping keys to applications using this program, you can then launch those applications from a single key-press. Bluetooth Opens the Bluetooth Manager which provides options for configuring various Bluetooth peripherals. It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem to exchange informa-
tion with other Bluetooth devices and provide network access. Certificates This program provides access to the Certificates Manager and Stores. The Certificates Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificates Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certifi-
cates. Certificates on page 63 directs you to the appropriate setup information. Compass This program provides you with a compass, and enables you to calibrate it. Date/Time Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time, and Time Zone on your unit. Dialing Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patternsfor example, Work, Home, and so on using this dialog box. Display Changes the display backlight and the appearance (colour scheme) on the unit desktop. Dr. Debug Provides both error diagnostic and troubleshooting tools. 50 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Icons Error Reporting Allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts. GPS Settings Allows you to enable and configure GPS operation. Imagers The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings. This icon is only present when the appropriate imager is installed. For detailed information, see Appendix B: Imager & Camera Set-
tings. Input Panel Provides the framework for a Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) should you need to design your own SIP, or change some soft keyboard options. Internet Options Provides options to configure your Internet browser. You can determine items such as the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, the cache size, the Internet connec-
tion options, and the security level that is applied when browsing. Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity, and many other functions. Manage Triggers This utility allows you to define buttons as triggers for different devices. For example you would use this utility to configure a button for the scanner, RFID reader, and camera. Microphone Enables you to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held. Network and Dial-up Connections Displays network interfaces and allows new dial-up and VPN interfaces to be created. It also allows Windows configuration of the interface. Refer to Connectivity on page 17 for details. Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. Network ID tab information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided by your System Administrator.) PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. By tapping on an application in the list, you are taken to the associated web site and allowed to install the application. Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place. PC Connection Enables direct connection to a desktop computer (or through ActiveSyncsee Data Transfer on page 17). Selecting the Change Connection button allows you to change the type of direct connection to your PC. Power Displays battery pack power status. (Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the taskbar.) Addi-
tional tabs allow you to determine suspend states and specify a suspend threshold. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 51 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Icons PsionVU PsionVU enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With PsionVU and PsionVU Shell (see The PsionVU Desktop Shell on page 41) you can customize the entire look and feel of your User Experience. Region and Language Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand-held screen along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region. Remove Programs Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and then click on the Remove button. Scanners Provides scanner parameters and the barcode symbologies that the Omnii barcode scanner will success-
fully read. Screen Rotation This feature enables you to change the screen rotatation between landscape or portrait. Storage Manager Allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present, such as SD-MMC flash cards. For details, see page 106. Stylus Adjusts how Windows Embedded CE recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps). In the Calibration tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the screen. System You can display the system and memory properties, as well as create your device name. In the Memory tab, you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory. System Properties Identifies the computers software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled. Total Recall Provides access to a backup\restore and deployment utility to maintain applications and settings over cold reboots and for multiple devices. TweakIt Allows you to change Advanced System Settings (interface, network, and servers), User System Settings
(display font size), and provides the Registry Editor. Volume & Sounds Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings, key clicks, and screen taps. You can also configure system (Windows) sounds and .wav files. Wireless WAN Provides access to technology like GSM/GPRS, which allows wide area networking capability such as inter-
net browsing via GSM/GPRS. It also provides access to the Phone API. For detailed information, see Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings. 52 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 4.3 App Launch Keys The App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the appli-
cation from a single key-press. In the Control Panel, choose the App Launch Keys icon. Chapter 4: Configuration App Launch Keys To assign an application key:
Tap the Add button. Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.) The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse through the information in your Omnii until you locate the application you want to launch. Once youve selected the file you want to map, tap on OK. The cursor moves to the Data field. You can use this field if you need to need to define command line pa-
rameters for your application. If you dont want to assign any parameters, you can leave the Data field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the WordPad application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the WordPad application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field. Tap on OK
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 53 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Bluetooth Setup If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another App Launch Key, you can do it from this final screen. Oth-
erwise, tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key. To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned. Bluetooth Setup 4.4 Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a 10 metre (32 ft.) range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate. It is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scan-
ners, printers, and so on. Psion provides built-in support for:
GSM/GPRS universal handset Bluetooth printer Bluetooth headset Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although Omnii in-
cludes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneouslythis has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11 network, Psion recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners). Bluetooth peripherals are configured by choosing the Bluetooth icon in the Control Panel. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the Omnii host. Note: The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna. In the Control Panel, choose the Bluetooth icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen. The Bluetooth Manager allows users to search, pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices within their personal area network. The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default. Before you begin the setup process:
Tap on the Mode tab, and tap in the checkbox next to Turn on Bluetooth. Tap on OK. 54 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Paired When the radio is enabled, a Bluetooth icon appears the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It is ready for setup. 4.4.1 Paired This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is <Device Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service. To learn how to scan for devices to pair, review Device on page 56. Note:
If a service is actively paired and connected, the device and its services are displayed in bold typeface in this list. Tap on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop-up menu. The displayed menu depends on the type of the service chosen. Query Services and Remove Commands Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen. Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab. OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands The OPP defines two rolesa Push Server and a Push Client. Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server. Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server. OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option:
Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected. When the transmis-
sion begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission. HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands The HSP (Headset Profile) allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 55 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Device HSP/HFP services provide the following unique menu options:
Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset. Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset. Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted. 4.4.2 Device In this tab, users can discover and display Bluetooth devices. 4.4.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of Omnii and lists them in this tab. Any existing devices previ-
ously discovered and listed will also be displayed. Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services. Note: To limit the number of devices listed to a particular type of device, refer to Filtering By Class of Device (COD), next section. 4.4.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD) This menu allows you to filter the displayed devices by their COD. If, for example, you choose Computer from this menu, only the devices that have the matching Computer COD value will be displayed. Choosing All lists all detected devices. 56 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 4.4.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu Chapter 4: Configuration Device The Device pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a device from the list. Pair begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered device. An authenti-
cation dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired. Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry, updating the name. This command is useful if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed remotely. Delete removes this device from the list. 4.4.2.4 Pairing a Device Follow the manufacturers instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode. Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area. To pair devices:
When the scan is complete, tap on the device to which you want to pair. An Authentication dialog box is displayed. In the pop-up Device menu, tap on Pair. If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box. To proceed without authentication, tap on Next. After entering the device PIN, the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 57 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Device Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it. Click on Done. Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box. Serial Profile is an example. This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting four differ-
ent Modes: Serial, ActiveSync, Scanner, and Printer Port. Serial is used for simple serial port communication. ActiveSync is for ActiveSync-over-Bluetooth. Scanner is used to create a connection to a barcode scanner. A serial connection is created, then the Scanner Services is notified of the connection so that the incoming barcode scan will be forwarded to Scanner Services directly. Printer Port must be chosen here if you want to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer. For further details, see Mode on page 59. 58 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Once youve completed the information, tap on Next and then in the Services screen, click on Done. 4.4.3 Servers Chapter 4: Configuration Servers When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to Omnii, the remote device is considered the Bluetooth master and the hand-held, the Bluetooth slave. In order for the remote device to connect to the hand-held, Omnii must offer a service in the form of a server. The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three server services available: Serial, Scanner and OBEX OPP. Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the drop-down menu. You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop-down menu. BSP (Bluetooth Serial Port) was created by Microsoft to allow Bluetooth to have its own serial prefix in order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used. Note: Even after a Serial Port Profile server is created, an application must open the created port before a remote device can connect. Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service (SCS). This is used for Bluetooth barcode scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input. OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed on Omnii after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device. Tap on the checkbox to activate the server. 4.4.4 Mode Turn on Bluetooth activates the Bluetooth radio. Discoverable determines whether Omnii is visible or invisible to other devices. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 59 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration About Printer Port allows you to assign and enable a virtual outgoing COM port selected from the drop-down menu to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer. Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, the printer must be on and connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect. Select a port within the Printer Port drop-down list, e.g. BSP1:
Check the Printer Port check box. Open the Device Tap-and-hold each Bluetooth Printer device entry and then select Pair, key-in the Passcode (if needed) and then tap Done. DO NOT select any services!
Close the Bluetooth Manager. Select the Bluetooth device to print toyou will need to key-in (or programmatically raise) the following key sequence [CTRL] [ALT] [F1]. You can now select the Bluetooth device to which you wish to print. tab and tap on Scan. 4.4.5 About Device Name displays the broadcasted name of the hand-held. The name can be changed in the System Properties applet: Start>Settings>Control Panel>System icon>Device Name tab. Local Address displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the Bluetooth chip. HCI Version & LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware. Component indicates the version of the Psion Bluetooth Subsystem (the manager, drivers, etc). Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific Omnii. 4.4.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection The following steps describe how to set up an Internet data connection using a GSM cellular telephone with Bluetooth. Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone, which then accesses a WAN (Wide Area Network) and transfers data using GPRS. 1. 2. Make the phone discoverable. 3. Pair the phone service with the Omnii Dial-Up Networking service using the Bluetooth Manager. Enable the Dial-Up Networking service in the cell phone.
(For instructions on pairing devices, refer to Pairing a Device on page 57.) 4. To set up the Internet parameters, choose the Network And Dial-up Connections icon from the Control Panel. 5. Tap on Make New Connection. 60 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection 6. In the Make New Connection dialog box, choose Dial-Up Connection. Enter a name for your GPRS network connection. 7. Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box. 8. In the drop-down menu labelled Select a modem, choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box. Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth equipped cellular telephone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box. Omnii then disconnects. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 61 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection 9. Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected within, and press [ENTER]
to save your changes. 10. In the Modem dialog box, choose the Next button to display the Phone Number dialog box. The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once youve specified all the necessary information, choose the Finish button. In the Control Panel, choose the Dialing icon. 11. 12. The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications. 62 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Certificates Once youve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press [ENTER] to save your changes. 13. At this point, return to the Control Panel, and choose the Network and Dial-up Connections icon. In the network connection window, the new network configurationin this case, New Connection is 14. displayed. Tap on the new icon. When you tap on your new connection, an onscreen message indicates the status of your connection: con-
nected, disconnected, error messages, and so on. 4.5 Certificates This program provides access to the Certificate Manager and Stores. The Certificate Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificate Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certificates. Omnii checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that Omnii explicitly trusts. This option is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance Omnii security. In the Control Panel, choose the Certificates icon. Your Omnii has certificates preinstalled in the computer. My Certificates is the repository for the devices personal certificate store, Other Authorities is the repository for the intermediate certificate store, and Trusted Authorities is the repository for the Trusted Root certificate store. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 63 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC You can import or remove certificates, and view certificate information for any listing, including names, dates, serial numbers, etc. For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side devices (Omnii Hand-
Held Computers), refer to the following website:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/techinfo/overview/security.mspx 4.6 Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft ActiveSync connectivity software can be used to connect your Omnii to PCs. If the Windows Vista , Windows 7 or later, operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not re-
quired to transfer data between your Omnii and your PC. By using a Snap Module or Desktop Docking Station with your Omnii, you can connect to a PC with a cable and:
View Omnii files from Windows Explorer. Drag and drop files between Omnii and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives. Back up Omnii files to the PC, restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, etc. 4.6.1 Uploading Data in a Docking Station The Desktop Docking Stations allow your hand-held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available. When Omnii is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the unit screen. For detailed information, refer to Desktop Docking Stations -
Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 141. 4.6.2 Using Microsoft ActiveSync Note:
If you use a serial port to connect devices like Omnii to your desktop computer, the connec-
tion may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at non-default baud rates. To work around this problem, set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to use the same baud rate as the device. You can set the baud rate by editing the registry on the desktop host computer, as detailed in the steps outlined at the following website:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324466 To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the programs setup wizard. For de-
tails, go to the following website and type the name into the search box:
64 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx Chapter 4: Configuration Using Windows Mobile Device Center 4.6.3 Using Windows Mobile Device Center If you are running Windows Vista, Windows 7, or later, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync. Instead, you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center. For instructions, go to the following website and type the name into the search box:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:
Tap on Start>Computer Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC. to display the drives. Omnii will be visible here. 4.7 Display Properties In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon. 4.7.1 Background In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Background tab. This dialog box allows you to customize your background image. 4.7.2 Appearance In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Appearance tab. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 65 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Backlight This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme. 4.7.3 Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time. The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the backlight remains on when the unit is not in use (no key press, scanner trigger, etc.). Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only. In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab. Note: Backlight changes take effect immediately. You do not need to reset the unit. To maximize battery run time, keep the display backlight brightness and active durations as low as possible. Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity. Bright For The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action (keypress, scan trigger). Dim For The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) after expiration of the Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place (such as a keypress or scan trigger). At the expiration of the Dim For duration, the display backlight shuts off. External Power Checkbox When you select the checkbox next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON, the back-
light remains ON at the configured intensity when Omnii is operating with external power (not battery power). If Omnii is drawing power from its battery, this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box take effect. 4.8 Dr. Debug Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic and troubleshooting tool. Tap on Start>Settings
>Control Panel. Tap on the Dr. Debug icon. 66 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Status 4.8.1 Status This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the debug engines. Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review. The logs should be used as reference when working with Psion Technical Support personnel. 4.8.2 Settings Choose an Error Level from the drop-down menu. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 67 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Utilities To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the right of the Log Folder option. 4.8.3 Utilities The Utilities tab is used to log network traffic. When you tap on the Start button, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion technician for evaluation. 4.9 Error Reporting Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
>Control Panel>Error Reporting icon to access your options. Tap on Start>Settings 4.10 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the GPS module is powered and operating, and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem. You can also set up the AGPS Manager (an assisted GPS utility). Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>GPS Settings icon. 68 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Power 4.10.1 Power This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The GPS Power drop-down menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off. Off the GPS module is left off, always. Always on the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the hand-held
(suspend or standby). On, and off in suspend the GPS module is powered on, but if Omnii is in suspend mode, the GPS module is turned off. 4.10.2 Profiles Tapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile: Default, Automotive or Pedestrian. Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses. Automotive profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as the vehicle moves. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted, it will attempt to predict the vehicle position. Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module will not attempt to predict the operators movement. 4.10.3 Programs Tap on the GPS Program Port drop-down menu to choose the communication (COM) port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 69 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration AGPS 4.10.4 AGPS To determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas, outdoors for example. However, if youre at-
tempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building, the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix. AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor cov-
erage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (orbital) data to Omnii periodically through Wi-Fi or WWAN. The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix. Update Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris (EE) files from a secure host on the Inter-
net using any interface that has an Internet connection. These files contain several days worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be used if the satellites broadcast ephemeris is not available. The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download, and once successfully downloaded, the Status field will read Idle. Settings Click on the Settings button to define the AGPS server connection settings. 70 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Info The AGPS server connection settings drop-down menu allows you to choose from two settings: Use default settings and Use custom settings. The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside from the Update field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your Omnii, the field values cannot be edited. The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an in-
tranet rather than the Internet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Psion personnel. They will be able to help you configure your Psion devices and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data. 4.10.5 Info This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version, the date on which files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is required, you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to Psion support staff. 4.11 Imager & Camera Settings The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager and camera settings. The principle uses of the applet are to decode barcodes and to capture images. A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to Demo on page 37 for details. Refer to Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings for configuration details. To launch this applet:
In the Control Panel, choose the Imagers icon. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 71 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Input Panel Note: This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed. To enable a newly-installed imager, Press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. 4.12 Input Panel Omnii is equipped with a Soft Input Panel (SIP). Shown below is the standard Microsoft SIP, accessed from the Control Panel. Soft Keyboard Input Panel Button Icon Tapping on the Input Panel button displays a soft input panel (soft keyboard) that can be customized using the Input Panel dialog box. Important: If the Input Panel button icon is not visible in the taskbar, from the Start menu, tap on Settings>Taskbar and Start Menu. Tap the checkbox next to Show Input Panel Button. To remove this icon from the taskbar, tap in the checkbox to erase the check mark. 72 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties The soft keyboard operates just like a standard keyboard except that rather than pressing a key, you tap on letters, numbers, modifier keys, etc. on the Omnii screen. To customize the appearance and behaviour of the soft keyboard:
Tap on the Input Panel icon in the Control Panel. Figure 4.2 Input Panel Properties Tap on the Options button to change the appearance of your soft keyboard. Note: You can also display this dialog box by double-tapping on the Input icon in the far-right cor-
ner of the taskbar. Figure 4.3 Soft Keyboard Options 4.12.1 Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the [FN] and [SYM] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters. In the Control Panel, choose the Keyboard icon. 4.12.1.1 Key Repeat Note: These settings apply when a key is held down continuously. In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Repeat tab. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 73 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties Repeat Delay The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats, and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time. Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate. Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings youve chosen. 4.12.1.2 Keyboard Backlight In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab. Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity. Note: The keypad backlight maximum brightness will decrease over time as it ages. Use mid-range intensity settings when possible to extend the backlight lifespan. When the backlight starts to dim, use this parameter to make it brighter. ON For The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on after the last user action (keypress or scan trigger). 74 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties Note: Tapping in the checkbox next to When using external power, keep the backlight always ON forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power. 4.12.1.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the One Shots tab. The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Omnii behave. For each modifier key[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN], and [SYM]you have the following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock. Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on. For example, if the [FN] key is locked on, the taskbar at the bottom of the screen dis-
plays it underlined. If this key is displayed without the underline in the taskbar, youll know that the key is not locked. It will become inactive following a key press. Important: Once youve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection. Lock If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it on until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off. OneShot If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed. OneShot/Lock OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you press the mod-
ifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed. If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked on, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it off. 4.12.1.4 Keyboard Macro Keys In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Macros tab. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 75 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties A macro has 200 programmable characters (or positions). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [ENTER], [BACKSPACE]
and [DEL] ([FN]-[BACKSPACE]), function keys and arrow keys. Recording and Saving a Macro You can program up to 6 macro keys, depending on your keyboard layout. You can also increase the number of virtual macro keys up to 15 using Scancode Remapping (for details, see Scancode Remapping on page 78). In the Macro
[M1]. Choose the Record button. menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1, to assign a macro to macro key A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record. Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro. When youve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key sequence: [CTRL] [ALT] [ENTER], or choose the Stop Recording button. A new screen called Verify Macro displays the macro sequence you created. The Save button is high-
lighted. Press [ENTER] to save your macro, or highlight CANCEL and press [ENTER] to discard it. Executing a Macro To execute a macro:
Press the macro key to which youve assigned the macro. For example, if you created a macro for macro key 1, press [M1] to execute the macro. 76 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties Deleting a Macro To delete a macro:
In the Macros tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete. Choose the Delete button. 4.12.1.5 Unicode Mapping In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Unicode Mapping tab. The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For ex-
ample, the sample screen above shows a (U+0061) indicating that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values. All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value. Adding and Changing Unicode Values Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Proper-
ties dialog box. Choose the Add/Change button. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 77 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list. In the sample screen above, a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0). Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key. Note: To add a shifted state, [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], press [TAB] to position the cursor in the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and/or CTRL Pressed. Press [SPACE] to select the shift state you want to assign. Removing Unicode Values In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and choose the Remove button. 4.12.1.6 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scan-
code that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the F key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER/Power] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume, etc.) or run a macro. There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the FN table and the SYM table. Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (P/N 8100016), note that the
[ORANGE] key is interchangeable with the [SYM] key. Similarly, in the context of the scan-
code mapping tables, Orange is interchangeable with SYM. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the FN table defines key presses that occur when the
[FN] modifier is on; the SYM table defines key presses that occur when the [SYM] modifier is on. The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remap-
ping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box. 78 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled V-Key. A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function. If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2). Adding a Remap To add a new remapping:
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed. Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box. Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode. Note: The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping. Virtual Key, Function and Macro The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be rema-
pped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro. When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent. When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box. When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 79 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Keyboard Properties Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro. Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box, and tap on OK. Editing a Scancode Remap To edit a scancode:
In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit. Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes. Tap on OK to save your changes. Removing a Remap To delete a remap:
In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. Tap on OK
. 4.12.1.7 Lock Sequence The Lock Sequence menu allows you to lock the Omnii keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed acci-
dentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster. To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence. Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup. In the Key sequence drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you will need to type to unlock the keyboard. Note:
It is useful to leave the Show popup message enabled (default) so that anyone attempting to use the keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard dis-
played on the screen. A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked. 80 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Manage Triggers Locked Keyboard Icon Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard. 4.13 Manage Triggers Allows users to configure how barcode scanners and other devices such as RFID readers are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time. In the Control Panel, choose the Manage Triggers icon. In the Manage Triggers screen youll see a list of trigger mappings. 4.13.1 Trigger Mappings A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the module(s)sometimes referred to as trigger consumer(s)of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, the external trigger (scan button) is software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the owner (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 81 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Add and Edit Trigger Mapping Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappingsfor example [F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twiceeven if the trigger type is different. A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data, or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to applications. Double-Click When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between 0 to 1000 mil-
liseconds), a double-click occurs. See also Trigger-Press Type on page 83. Show All Modules By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed. Add Tapping this button brings up the Add Mapping dialog (see page 82), so that you can add new trigger map-
pings. Edit Tapping this button brings up the Edit Mapping dialog (see page 82), so that you can edit existing trigger mappings. Remove Tapping this button removes an existing mapping. OK The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the cancel button X is tapped instead, or the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will be discarded. 4.13.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping These dialogs allow you to add and edit trigger mappings. Trigger Key This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Soft Scan, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected. 82 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Microphone Note:
It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers)for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers. It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer)for example, two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID File System. Add Key Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the Add Key button. A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source. Trigger-Press Type You can enable either an Up/Down or Double Click response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger
(keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a trigger down event is sent to the ownerthat is, the appli-
cation receiving the trigger press informationfollowed by a trigger up. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a double-click event will have oc-
curred. If a mapping with the type Up/Down has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events. Module Trigger This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses. Show All Modules By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both active and inactive, are displayed. 4.14 Microphone In the Control Panel, choose the Microphone icon. Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 83 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Open TekTerm Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain. Slide the microphone tab to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain. Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone youve chosen to the default gain. Tapping on Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain. 4.15 Open TekTerm Open TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. Omnii includes unique features that support Open TekTerm, a Psion application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host com-
puters. For detailed information, please refer to the Open TekTerm Software User Manual, P/N 8000073. 4.16 PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associ-
ated web site. The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Representative from the Psion contact web page. www.psion.com/us/about/contact_psion-offices.htm Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Psion. Tapping on a preloaded client in this screen displays a drop-down menu from which the operator can choose from an array of related options. In the example following, Stay-Linked Documentation was chosen. 84 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Pocket PC Compatibility 4.17 Pocket PC Compatibility Omnii supports the AYGShell API set that allows Pocket PC-compatible applications to run on the hand-
held. Windows Embedded CE includes application programming interface (API) compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in units running Windows Embedded CE. The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002-based applications and Windows Embedded CE based devices:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-
us/dncenet/html/WINCENET_CEPCC_App.asp 4.18 Power Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the units battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use. In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon. 4.18.1 Battery Capacity In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery tab to view battery details. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 85 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Power Saving Suspend 4.18.2 Power Saving Suspend In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Suspend tab. Power Source This drop-down menu allows you to specify whether the unit is using AC Power or Battery Power. Suspend Timeout Important: Psion recommends setting the Suspend value to 3 minutes. To further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time that the display back-
light is on (see Backlight on page 66). When Omnii is idlenot receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and so on) or system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on)the hand-held uses the value assigned in the Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep (appear to be off). 86 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity, the unit enters suspend state. In suspend state, the Omnii CPU enters a sleep state, and wireless communication is shut off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing [ENTER] wakes the system from suspend state. 4.18.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup The Suspend Threshold adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery drains. If you choose Maximum Operating Time, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose Maximum Backup Time, the hand-held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time. Important: Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20% of the battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system RAM memory is lost and the unit must cold boot. In most real-time transaction environments this is not a problem (it only takes a few seconds to cold boot). Batch transaction environments, where data is not saved to a non-volatile memory (such as an SD FLASH card), may need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion does not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM. The Omnii Windows Embedded CE 6.0 environment does not store any critical data in RAM (such as the registry or file system). If your application does not save data to RAM, Psion recommends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to maximize battery run time. The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand-held. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold menu, Omnii shuts off auto-
matically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the computer. Once Omnii shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle. Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours. Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes;
this increases the Omnii operating timethe amount of time the unit will operate before shutting downbut reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours. Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the computer while the battery is swapped for a fully charged one. Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data stored on Omnii for approximately 5 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses. 4.18.4 Advanced In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Advanced tab. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 87 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Built-in Devices Allow Suspend With This menu allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend Mode while it is operating with an active PPP connection, network interface or active TCP/IP connection. Low Power Warnings The sliding scale at the bottom of this menu allows you to specify the remaining battery capacity at which a warning message is displayed on the Omnii screen, from 0% to 20%. 4.18.5 Built-in Devices In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Built-in Devices tab. WWAN Power Mode This menu allows you to enable power to your WWAN radio, and whether or not the radio will turn off when Omnii enters Suspend Mode. To configure the radio, please refer to Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings. 4.18.6 Battery Health The Battery Health service provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measure-
ments, beyond just capacity. Important: Battery Health is an estimate and should not be depended on to provide a 100%
account of battery condition. In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Battery Health tab. 88 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Battery Health Battery Health The Battery Health default values are shown here as ***** (Excellent), *** (Used), and * (Battery should be replaced). If you tap on the battery icon in the taskbar, a pop-up screen will show the state of the battery. The image below shows the default Excellent status screen. Enable Battery Health Service This option allows you to enable the service. To access the menus after enabling the service, you will need to either wait until a resume from Suspend or restart Omnii. Wakeup Device on Battery Insert When this option is enabled, whenever the battery is replaced Omnii is powered up from Suspend and the current health of the battery is displayed. Add Health Colour to the Taskbar Battery Tray Icon Enabling this option changes the background colour for the battery icon in the Taskbar, based on battery condition: Green (excellent), Yellow (used), and Red (battery should be replaced). Show Popup UI on Device-Resume You can decide when the battery status pop-up user interface (UI) will appear, for how many seconds, and whether the battery cycle count is displayed (off by default). Edit You can customize the ratings text with the Edit option. By enclosing your text within the html tag used for Bold <b> (or removing the tag to unbold the text), you can change the text that will appear in the pop-up battery status screen. For example, the default text Excellent can be changed to: Battery is excellent, and will last one day shift.... Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 89 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Psion Camera 4.19 Psion Camera The Psion Camera applet allows you to snap photographs and record video footage. It is also a photo and video viewing program. Important: The Psion Camera program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats. Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they are transferred to Omnii. 4.19.1 Using the Camera Tap on the Desktop icon: Psion Camera. Keep in mind that if there are no pictures stored on your Omnii as yet, youll only see the Camera icon in this screen. The screen will display the image your camera is pointed at. (The camera is built into the back of Omnii.) Tap on the Camera icon to activate the camera. 90 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Moving Photos to Omnii Tapping on the camera icon or on Menu displays thumbnails of photos stored on Omnii. Frame the image in the Omnii screen. Press [ENTER] to snap the photograph. Photo Menu When the camera is activated, tapping on Menu displays a set of commands to help you modify how your camera operates, the quality of the photos it takes, and so on. You can also use this menu to activate the video recorder rather than the still camera. Note:
Video is a toggle command. When the Still camera is activated, Video is available in this menu. When the video recorder is activated, Still (camera) is available in this menu. 4.19.2 4.19.3 Moving Photos to Omnii Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync. Locate the pictures on your PC, and drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device (Omnii). Omnii can be found under Computer (My Computer on PCs running Windows XP). Opening a Photo To open a photo, tap on Desktop icon: Psion Camera. Youll see a thumbnail of your photos. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 91 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Deleting a Photo Tap on a thumbnail to open the photo. Note:
If youve stored your photos on a storage card, youll need to tap on the storage card icon to display your photos. 4.19.4 Deleting a Photo Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop-up menu. Tap on Delete. Confirm your choice when prompted. 4.19.5 Using the Video Recorder Tap on the Menu>Video. Press [ENTER] to begin recording. To end the video, press [ENTER] again, or tap on the Stop softkey. Note: When the Video recorder is activated, a Menu is available to tailor the operation of the recorder, the quality of the recording, and so on. 92 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration PsionVU Access 4.20 PsionVU Access PsionVU Access enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU Shell either in the PsionVU Access settings (see Other Shell Themes on page 96) or by tapping on the Desktop icon PsionVU Shell (see The PsionVU Desktop Shell on page 41). In the Control Panel, choose the PsionVU icon. When opening the PsionVU application, the PsionVU Access dialog will come up that enables you to either proceed to the PsionVU Settings menus, or change from you current Access mode to the other (Administra-
tor or User). The computer must be reset following a change, and a confirmation will appear to enable you to continue or dismiss the change. When opening the PsionVu Settings option, the following menus will be available:
Figure 4.4 PsionVU Settings 4.20.1 Administrator Password By setting an Administrator Password, you can limit access to various different components on the compu-
ter and the system tray icons for security. The default security setting allows User access to all options, therefore restrictions and settings can be configured without setting a password. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 93 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Shell Settings Note:
If a setting or restriction is configured without setting an Administrator password, the follow-
ing message is displayed: !Administrator password is currently not set. Once a password has been set, the message will disappear. When an administrator password is set, the restricted options are accessed using a key combination. If a password has been set, the user would be prompted for the password. The option Show Password changes the displayed password from hidden (***) to readable. 4.20.2 Shell Settings The Shell Settings application has two menus: Applications and Advanced. Applications The Applications menu lists all the applications installed on the computer, alphabetically. The items checked in this view are shown on the Desktop. 94 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Shell Settings The Add and Edit buttons allow you to search for and add an application to the list of items in the selection window. You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the Add option will be greyed out and the following message is displayed: !Maximum 18 entries reached. When you select an application and tap on Edit, you will see fields for Command, Parameters, and Display Name. Command: The Command field is prefilled with the path and name of the executable (.exe) or corre-
sponding link (.lnk). If the selected file cant be found (e.g. external memory card has been removed, files have been deleted), a message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: These files cannot be found. Parameters: The Parameters option provides the option of adding extra parameters to the applica-
tion (for .exe files only, not .lnk). For example, if the Command field is running pword.exe
(Microsoft WordPad), the Parameters field could specify a document to open. Display name: This is an editable field which is prefilled with the name of the application. Advanced The Applications menu allows you to enable or disable some device functions. Windows Classic Shell The following options can be enabled or disabled in the Windows Classic Shell Desktop theme:
Start Menu Bar: If disabled, access to both Start Menu and Notifications are disabled. The Notifica-
tion tooltips will still display. Any changes made will occur after a device reset. Start Button: If disabled, access to the Start Button and Notifications are disabled. The Notification tooltips will still display. Note:
If Disable access to the Start Button is selected, but the PsionVU Access by Key Sequence remains unchecked, you will see the following status-message !A Key Sequence is required when the Start Button is disabled., the checkbox will be auto-checked, and the focus will be set to the key-sequence selection. Notifications: If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display. PsionVU Access in Start Menu: When this box is checked, the PsionVU Access program will be shown in the Start Menu>Programs list. The following item is not optional:
PsionVU Access Key Sequence: Sets the key sequence to open PsionVU Access. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 95 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Restrictions Other Shell Themes The following options can be enabled or disabled in the PsionVU Shell Desktop themes (shown in the drop-
down list as Ingenuity, Active_Glow, Clear_Run, and Flip_Side_Blue):
Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to one of the PsionVU themes shown herebut by tapping on the Desktop icon PsionVU Shell (see The PsionVU Desktop Shell on page 41), the Ingenuity theme is automatically loaded. The com-
puter must be reset in order for the shell to change. Use this picture as the background: You can select a picture as the Desktop background. Notifications: If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display. Launch an application Startup: A window is displayed listing all of the installed and added applica-
tions. Any applications selected will startup after a reboot. The following item is not optional:
PsionVU Access Key Sequence: Sets the key sequence to open PsionVU Access. 4.20.3 Restrictions This section deals with items that are by default available to users but can be restricted by an administrator. Advanced The Advanced menu lists the system features you can restrict or block. Notifications The Notifications menu allows you to block or disable notifications. 96 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Control Panel Settings 4.20.4 Control Panel Settings In these menus you can set which applets and tabs you want to Hide in Control Panel, and which applets and tabs will be Accessible as a shortcut icon from the Desktop. You have the option of setting the entire applet or specific tabs within the applet as hidden or accessi-
ble. Any applet that cant be set is greyed out. You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the following message is displayed: !Maximum 18 entries reached. 4.20.5 Import/Export to File This option enables you to Export your settings file (.xml), and save it in the location of your choice. In addi-
tion, an Administrator has the option to Import these settings from one device to multiple devices of the same operating system. Important: A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all Psion .xml files with a predefined name so that other Psion utilities can locate it. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 97 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Remote Desktop Connection Tapping on the Export button will display a Save As Export Settings dialog, with the default name PsionVU_Settings.xml, which the Administrator can change even after it has been saved. The .xml file contains all of the PsionVU configured settings, including the Administrator Password. When the file is imported to a device, the new password is applied immediately. Whether choosing to import or export files, the same file location options under My Device will be listed. Following the action, a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file will be displayed. With the exception of the password, changes made to settings will take effect only after a warm reset. If further changes to the configuration are made, they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation. After importing a file, a dialog will appear to enable you to reset now or later. 4.21 Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine, using Omnii (Windows Embedded CE device). Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this connection: http://www.mi-
crosoft.com/windowsxp/using/mobility/getstarted/remoteintro.mspx or contact Psion support services. Locate the office closest to you at: www.psion.com/service-and-support.htm 4.22 Scanners The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner con-
figuration and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize. The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit. Important: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. 98 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Barcodes You can test the scanner to ensure that it is operating properly by pointing the scanner window at a barcode that your scanner was designed to decode for example, a 1D UPC barcode or 2D barcode. Press the SCAN key or pistol trigger, and check for a valid decode on the hand-helds screen. For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter E: Omnii Specifications. 4.22.1 Barcodes 4.22.1.1 Scanner The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held: Decoded (internal), Decoded
(Intermec ISCP), Imager and Non-decoded. The symbologies listed in the Barcodes tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always defer to your barcode scanners programming manual when in doubt about the availabil-
ity or settings for any parameter. Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel, under the System Properties tab. Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to on) only those codes that are required by the application. For information on configuring the barcode symbologies, see Appendix C: Scan-
ner Settings. Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes. 4.22.1.2 Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters or all scanner parameters. Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop-up menu. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 99 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Options Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings. To reset a single parameter to its default setting:
Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset. Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting. 4.22.2 Options This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters, display, and data handling options associated with your scanner. 100 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Options 4.22.2.1 Double Click Parameters Click Time (msec) This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowa-
ble range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature. A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter. When a value is not assigned for the Click Data, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan. Click Data This parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your Omnii following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero. 4.22.2.2 Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled, the type of barcode and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen. Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is ac-
tivated. Scan Result Time (sec) The value assigned to the Scan Result Time parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of 0 (zero) disables the param-
eter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value. Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired, point the scanner away from the barcode and press the trigger. Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not Omnii emits an audible scanner beep when a good (success-
ful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it. Multiple Beep Tones You can set the audible scanner beep to emit a series of three beeps instead of one. Set this parameter to on to enable the multiple beep tones. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 101 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Translations Good Scan Vibrates and Bad Scan Vibrates These parameters determine whether or not Omnii creates a vibration when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to on to enable the vibration. You can set the Number and Duration of vibrations, as well as the Pause between vibrations. The screen above shows the default settings. Soft Scan Timeout This parameter is used by the SDK Scan function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec (default is 3 sec). Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output barcode are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if Scan Log File is enabled, there is a slight performance reduction when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage. 4.22.2.3 Data Handling Codepage If you are encountering a scan failure because there is an unrecognized language character in the barcode, the Codepage option may correct the problem by allowing the ISO-8859-1 Latin 1 codepage to be used. The default value is Default Local ASCII. Important: Do not change this parameter from the default setting unless you are certain that it will correct your scan problem. 4.22.3 Translations The Translations menu allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a barcode and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successfulif a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails. 102 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Translations In the Translation menu, tap on the Case # to create rules. Tap on the No rule drop-down menu to display the rules. When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 103 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Ports 4.22.3.1 Case Rules No ruleignored. Search and replacereplaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.) The case rules are defined as follows:
Match at indexmatches the match string at a specified index. Match and replace at indexmatches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it. Replace at indexreplaces/changes unspecified data in a given range. Add barcode prefix/suffixadds a global prefix or suffix. Verify barcode sizeverifies the barcode size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before cre-
ating subsequent rules. Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the barcode size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied. Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file (see Scan Log File on page 102) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing. 4.22.4 Ports Figure 4.5 Console and Port Replicator Port Settings While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab. Use these settings to ensure that the communication ports on Omnii match the settings of the serial devices to which they are connected. If the settings do not match exactly, the devices may not function. Note that some devices can auto-detect serial port settings (such as baud rate), and in this case Omnii will dictate the settings. Baud rates often have a direct impact on performancethey should be set as high as possible while still ensuring reliable communication. 4.22.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) are standard RS-232 DE-9 DTE ports on the Omnii port replicator module, available on some snap modules and cradle types. Enabled This parameter must be set to ON in order for Omnii to recognize the device connected to the Port Replica-
tor 9-pin (COM5). Power (COM6 only) Pin 9 on Omnii COM6 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF. This parameter must be set to ON to enable power to a Snap Module or Vehicle cradle. 104 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Ports Baud Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer. Figure 4.6 Port Baud Rates Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte. Most devices use 8-bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits. Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity. Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits1, 1.5 or 2used for asynchronous communication. Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to an Omnii port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off, the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams. Double-tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 el-
ements. These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, suppose you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the module to trigger. Next, you assign a trigger keyfor this example, . (period). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key, enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields. When you press the trigger key, the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key, the Trigger Off Sequence is sent, turning the trigger key on and off. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 105 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Storage Manager 4.23 Storage Manager The Storage Manager allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present in Omnii, such as SD-MMC flash cards and Compact Flash cards. 4.23.1 Formatting a Memory Card Formatting a memory card bulk-erases it. Once a card is erased, partitions may be created in it, similarly to those on a hard drive. Memory-card devices are normally mounted (made available to the system) auto-
matically when they are inserted. They must be dismounted before they can be formatted. To format an entire memory card:
1. 2. Select Start> Settings>Control Panel. In Control Panel, double-click on the Storage Manager icon. The Storage Manager menu opens:
Select the memory card from the drop-down list. 1. 2. Press the Dismount button to dismount the memory card. All partitions on the card will be dismounted. 3. Press the Format button to format the memory card. All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process. 4.23.2 Creating Partitions Once the card is formatted, new partitions can be created in it. The default is to create one partition that occupies the whole card, but a card can be divided into more than one partition if desired. Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer. To create new partitions:
1. Press the New button next to the Partitions list box. The Create New Partition dialog box appears:
106 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Partition Management 1. 2. 1. Type a name for the partition. If more than one partition is desired, uncheck the Use All Available Diskspace checkbox, then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition. Press OK. The new partition appears in the Partitions list. The new partition is automatically mounted. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its name in the parti-
tion list. Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left, and additional partitions can be created in it. 4.23.3 Partition Management Partitions can be individually dismounted, mounted, deleted, or formatted as well. These and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog:
To dismount a partition:
1. 2. 3. Choose the desired partition. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears. Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list. Select the desired partition. Tap the Delete button. A warning dialog appears. Tap the OK button. The partition is deleted. To delete a partition:
1. 2. 3. To format a partition:
1. 2. 3. Choose the desired partition. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears. Tap the Dismount button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list. 4. Tap the Format button. The Format dialog appears:
Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 107 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Partition Management 5. Choose your format options. These options include:
Version of file system (FAT-16, for devices holding up to 4 GB; or FAT-32, for devices containing up to 32 GB). Number of FATs (File-Allocation Tables). Number of entries allowed in the root directory. Cluster size (.5 KB to 64 KB). There are also two checkboxes, which govern:
Whether to use the transaction-safe FAT file system (TFAT). This file system keeps multiple copies of the file-allocation table, changing one while maintaining another as a backup. Whether to perform a quick format. Quick formatting removes all reference to data in the partition without erasing the actual partition. The partition will be treated as empty, and new data will over-
write it. 6. Tap Start. The partition is formatted. To mount a partition:
1. 2. 3. Choose the desired partition. Tap the Properties button. The Partition Properties dialog appears. Tap the Mount button. The partition is mounted. The asterisk appears next to its name in the par-
titions list. The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions. Partitions can be defragmented, and their file structure can be scanned. 108 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Stylus Properties 4.24 Stylus Properties Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor. In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon. 4.24.1 Double-Tap In the Double-Tap touchscreen. menu, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the 4.24.2 Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the directions below. Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button. Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen You will be prompted to save the calibration data. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 109 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Touch Note:
If you do not receive a prompt to save your data, there could be a problem with your touch-
screen hardware. Contact your Psion representative. 4.24.3 Touch This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen. Choose the Touch tab. Select the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel. 4.25 System Properties This program identifies the computers software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their identification, version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled. In the Control Panel, choose the System Properties icon. You can create a log (SystemProperties.xml) of your current components, which will be placed in the My Devices folder in Windows Explorer. Instead of expanding each section of items individually, you can also choose to open all the lists at once by choosing the Expand button, which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well. 110 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 4.26 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot, and clone settings to other devices. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept. In the Control Panel, choose the Total Recall icon. Chapter 4: Configuration Total Recall 4.26.1 Creating a Backup Profile In the start up screen, you can choose from four options: Create Backup, Create Clone, Manage Profile and Delete Profile. button to begin the process. Tap on the Create Profile Create Backup
(optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile Location field. This dialog box displays the default profile name, the type of restore AutoRestore or ManualRestore, and the possible storage destination for the profile file. To change the Profile Name In the Name field, type a new name. (You may need to move the onscreen keyboard down to make the Name field visible.) Tap on OK Next, choose the profile Type you want to create:
ManualRestore creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator. AutoRestore creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold reset or a clean reset. Finally, if you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the [...] button to the right of the Profile Location field. to save the new profile name. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 111 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Creating a Backup Profile Important: Any profile not stored in persistent memory (flash disk, external usb drive) will be erased during a clean boot, therefore you should store profiles on a persistent drive. When performing an autorestore, the program only searches for profiles located in the root folder of persistent drives. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored. When there are multiple autorestore profiles found, only the latest is restored. Navigate to the new location, and tap on OK to save it. Tap on the (Next) button. Defining the Type of Backup Default Backup Default Backup is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries, and the Registry are saved. Choose Advanced Backup if you want to tailor your backup. Advanced Backup Choosing Advanced Backup allows you to define what you would like to include in your backup profile. Tap in the checkbox next to the option(s) listed here to tailor what you want included in the backup. Creating a Profile Tap on the Create Profile button. Once youve defined the type of profile you want to create:
The options you chose to back up appear in your window as the backup progresses. When the backup is complete, the last item in the list indicates the location and name of the backup profile. 112 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Restoring a Profile Restoring a Profile To manually restore a profile:
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Restore Profile. Tap on the
button to the right of the Profile field and locate your backup file. Tap on OK In the Profile restore screen, click on the (Next) button. Click on Restore Profile to restore the files to your Omnii. Viewing a Profile To view a profile:
In the Total Recall home screen, tap on View Profile. Tap on the
button to the right of the Profile field, and locate your backup file. 4.26.2 4.26.3 Tap on OK
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 113 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Deleting a Profile Tap on View Details to review your backup files. 4.26.4 In the Total Recall home screen, tap on Delete Profile. In the next screen, locate your backup file, and tap on OK. Deleting a Profile A warning pop-up screen appears asking if youre certain that you want to delete this file. to delete the file. Tap on Yes 4.27 TweakIt This utility allows you to tweak or adjust Advanced system settings (interface, network, servers, driver, and radio), User settings (Internet Explorer settings, font size, and docking port message), and provides a Registry Editor. 4.27.1 Advanced 4.27.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings FTP Server This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folderthat is, data are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server. 114 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change. 4.27.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings Chapter 4: Configuration Advanced Enable IPv6 This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification, version 6, that has been published to enable 128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4). Modem Logging When this option is enabled, Omnii logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt. 4.27.1.3 Advanced Services Settings Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 115 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration User SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Omnii time with the server time. A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered. 4.27.2 User 4.27.2.1 User Display Settings User Font Size This option allows you to adjust the size of the font used in the Omnii display: Large, Normal, or Small. 4.27.3 TweakIt This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values. Warning:
Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to Omnii. 4.28 Voice Using the Phone Dialer If the WWAN modem is installed and enabled, the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar. Double click on the Phone icon to access the phone dialer. You can also follow the steps below to access the phone dialer:
To access the dialer, tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel. 116 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Tap on the Wireless WAN icon The Voice tab displays a phone dialer used to dial phone numbers. The Voice menu provides commands which allow you to manage your phone contacts, view your phone history, and so on.
, and then tap on the Voice tab. Chapter 4: Configuration Dialing a Number Phone Number Entry Field Universal International Dialing Prefix Send Button Backspace Button End Button Mute Button 4.28.1 Dialing a Number To make a phone call, all you need is the recipients phone number. Type the recipients phone number in the phone number entry field.
- Send button tap to dial the number you typed.
- Backspace button tap to erase characters in the phone number entry field.
- End button tap to disconnect the phone call.
- Mute button During a phone call, tap to mute sound transmission. Tap again to restore sound.
+ button When making an international call, the + sign can be used as a universal substitute for any international dialing prefix and is guaranteed to work worldwide. The entry sequence must be as follows: + country code followed by phone number. Example: A standard phone number: 011 36 30 275 28466 using the + substitution is typed as follows:
+36 30 275 28466 The + symbol replaces the universal dialing prefix 011. 4.28.2 Voice Menu This menu allows you to manage calls, view your call history, and if required, assign a call forwarding service to your hand-held. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 117 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Voice Menu Call Lists The Call List command manages your call history, listing calls youve Dialed, Received and Missed. When you choose one of these commands, a dialog box lists the phone numbers. A drop-down menu provides a list of commands you can execute on a phone number in the Call List. You can choose to:
Dial the number, Send a New SMS, or Add to phonebook to add the highlighted phone number to your phonebook. (Refer to Phonebook on page 119 for details additional details about the Phonebook.) In the Call List:
Highlight the phone number with which you want to work. Choose a command in the drop-down menu. Tap on the Execute button to carry out the command. Services The Service menu offers a Call Forwarding option for your hand-held. If you choose this option, it may take a number of seconds for your unit to read the network settings. To forward all calls:
Tap in the checkbox next to Forward all calls, and then type the phone number to which all incoming phone calls will be routed. To specify when a call will be forwarded, that is:
Forward the call only when it is not answered after a specified number of seconds, Forward the call when you have identified yourself as unavailable, or Forward the call when your unit is busy:
Tap in the appropriate checkbox, and enter the phone number to which the call will be routed. 118 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration File Menu Phonebook Management Call Management The Call Management option only becomes available in the Voice menu when at least one phone call is either On hold or Active. When you choose this command, the currently active phone call is listed in a dialog box. Using the drop-down menu, you can choose to:
Hang Up All Calls - This option only appears when more than one call is listed. Hang Up - This option disconnects only the call youve highlighted in the list. Hold - This option places the call youve highlighted on hold. Retrieve - This option is only available when a call is on hold, and choosing it retrieves the call you have highlighted from hold. In the Call Management list, highlight the phone number to which youd like to apply a command. Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the command on the highlighted phone number. If you have two active calls on your hand-held, one On Hold and one Active, you can set up a conference call between yourself and the other callers. To set up a conference call:
Both calls will be listed as Active in the Call Management list. All calls are now conferenced so that you as well as your callers can speak to one another. Highlight the phone number that is currently On Hold, and choose Retrieve. Tap on Execute. 4.28.3 File Menu Phonebook Management Tapping on the File menu provides access to your Phonebook. Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store frequently used phone numbers. When no numbers have been added to your phonebook, the only command available to you is New Entry. To add a new phone number to your phonebook:
Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 119 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Volume & Sounds Properties Choose New Entry in the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute. Type the name corresponding to the phone number you want to add. Press Tab and type the phone number you want to store. Tap in the checkbox next to Store in SIM to save the phone number there, or leave this checkbox blank if you prefer not to store the number on the SIM card. Tap on the Execute button to save the phone number in your Phonebook. Phonebook entries are saved even after you exit Wireless WAN. Once youve added a phone number to the Phonebook, a list of new commands is available in the drop-
down menu. New Entry to add another phone number, New SMS (Short Message Service) to send a new SMS, Edit Entry to change an existing name and/or phone number, or Delete Entry to erase an existing phone entry. You can choose one of the following:
In the Phonebook:
Highlight the entry with which you want to work. Choose a command from the drop-down menu, and tap on Execute to carry out the command. 4.29 Volume & Sounds Properties Omnii supports several audio options, including Bluetooth. The beeper is used for the standard sounds: key clicks, screen taps, and scanning. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and
.wav files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver. In the Control Panel, choose the Volume & Sounds icon. 120 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Volume Adjustments 4.29.1 Volume Adjustments Slide the volume button to the left to lower the volume or to the right to increase the volume. Under the heading Enable sounds for, enable the conditions under which you want the hand-held to emit a sound. 4.29.2 Sound Adjustments This dialog box allows you to assign sounds to identify particular actions. For example, you can choose the sound your hand-held will emit when you close a program and choose another sound for a failed scan, etc. 4.30 Wi-Fi Config The Wi-Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11b/g radio for one or more wireless network profiles. A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options. Note:
In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator. To launch the Wi-Fi Config application:
Tap on Start>Programs>Wi-Fi Config
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 121 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Status The Wi-Fi Config screen is displayed. 4.30.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which Omnii is configured to connect. When there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated. Disable/Enable Radio: This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether the radio is turned off or on. 4.30.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the Configure tab. Connect: Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration. Add New: Used to create a new wireless network configuration. Edit: Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration. 122 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure Remove: Used to delete a wireless network configuration. Scan: Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network in the list, and tap on Add New to activate the network. There are two methods available when configuring a radio networkyou can either scan for an existing network or manually create a network. If you tap on the Scan button, a list of networks detected by the radio is displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add ad-
ditional information, depending on your network requirements. If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button, you can create a network manually. Important: The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described here. Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) for your network. 4.30.2.1 Authentication Mode Omnii supports several classes of authenticationOpen, WEP, WPA/WPA2 (Personal PSK, Enterprise, CCKM-
WPA, CCKM-WPA2), and 802.1x with EAP. Tapping on the Auth. Mode menu displays your authentication op-
tions. Note: Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields appropriate to the authorization mode youve chosen. Open Authentication Open authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, Omnii will connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 123 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If you choose this option, you can specify the type of WEP authenticationOpen or Shared, the WEP security key length64 bit or 128 bit and the key typeASCII or Hex. WEP Key fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point. WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key) When PSK is selected, either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSKa shared key must be configured on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the Encryp-
tion drop-down menu: TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES. 802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise, CCKM-WPA & CCKM-WPA2 These authentication modes use 802.1X with EAP authentication. When 802.1X is selected, Omnii uses WEP encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the others, the user may choose TKIP, AES or TKIP+AES encryption. 4.30.2.2 Encryption The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data. Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop-down menu. Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth. Mode youve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu will not be available at all. 4.30.2.3 EAP This menu allows you to choose the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for 802.1x authen-
tication to an access point. The following EAP types are supported by Wi-Fi Config:
TLS: Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication. 124 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Configure PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2: Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traf-
fic. MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method. This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains. PEAPv1-GTC: PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords
(OTPs) for authentication against OTP data bases such as SecureID. LEAP: Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off-line dictionary attacks. FAST-MSCHAPv2: Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains. Complete the fields in the Configure Profile screen. If youre uncertain about some of the options, your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information for your wireless network. Once youve completed the necessary fields, tap on OK. 4.30.2.4 Verify Server Certificate When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked, Omnii will verify the certificate provided by the authenti-
cation server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on Omnii for the verification. 4.30.2.5 Enable OPMK When used with compatible wireless infrastructure, Opportunistic Key Caching (OPMK) reduces the number of full authentications required when roaming. Only available with WPA2-Enterprise (EAP) authentication mode. 4.30.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab. An [X] next to a network indicates that this is the network to which Omnii will connect. 125 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Configuring TCP/IP Tap on the Connect button to activate your network. The Status tab is displayed. The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802.11b/g radio attempts to connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the Status tab is populated with the appropriate information about your network. 4.30.3 Configuring TCP/IP If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. 4.30.3.1 IP Address To assign an IP address for your Omnii:
Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar, or Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections. Tap on the radio icon for which you want to assign an IP addressin the sample screen below, the icon is labelled SDIO86861. 126 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Configuring TCP/IP The Wireless Statistics screen is displayed. Tap on the IP Information tab. Figure 4.7 SDIO86861 IP Information Note: When DHCP is enabled, tapping the Renew button forces Omnii to renew or find a new IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your hand-held is dropped from the network. To define a static IP address:
Tap on the Configure button. Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address to select it. Type an IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields. Press [ENTER] to save your information. 127 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Wi-Fi Config: Advanced 4.30.3.2 Name Server Note:
If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically. In the SDIO86861 IP Information tab (see Figure 4.7), tap on the Configure button. Tap on the Name Servers tab. The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###. 4.30.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Use Windows to configure my wireless settings In the Advanced tab you can set Windows to configure the radio, using Wireless Zero Config. Tap on the checkbox to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to enable this option. Tap here to add a checkmark to activate the Windows radio configuration. Power Save Mode This allows you to set the 802.11 power saving mode of the radio to: CAM (continuous accessalways on)
(recommended); or MAX_PSP (maximum power saving mode). Roaming - RSSI Threshold This sets the RSSI threshold value, below which the radio will start scanning for new access points when roaming. Values range from -55 to -90 dBm. Roaming - AP Delta This sets how much greater (in dBm) the RSSI of a new access point must be than the RSSI of the currently associated access point in order for the hand-held to initiate a roam. Values range from 5 to 30 dBm. 128 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Monitoring the Network Connection Choose Start>Shutdown>Warm Reset. A dialog box is displayed letting you know that you will lose all unsaved data. Tap on OK. Concluding the Wi-Fi Configuration If youve made changes in the Advanced menus, you will need to warm reset your Omnii. Once the reset is complete, if you checked the box next to Use Windows to configure my wireless set-
tings, the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed on the hand-held. Refer to Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings for details. 4.30.5 Monitoring the Network Connection Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the wireless statistics dialog box. The radio signal icon in the taskbar indicates the strength of the communication link with an 802.11 access point. To access the radio signal icon:
To access the radio signal icon using the keyboard:
Press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu. Highlight Shortcuts and then choose System Tray from the sub-menu. Use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] arrow keys to highlight the radio signal icon in the taskbar. Press [ENTER] to display the Wireless Statistics dialog box. Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by logging in again. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 129 Regulatory Draft Chapter 4: Configuration Monitoring the Network Connection 130 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft
1 2 3 4 5 | user manual III | Users Manual | 4.50 MiB |
5 ACCESSORIES 5 ACCESSORIES
. 5.1 Pistol Grips . 5.3 Power Adaptor Options . 5.1.1 5.1.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip . 5.2 Carrying and Protective Accessories . 5.5.1 Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii. 5.5.2 Indicators . 5.5.3 Operation . 133
. 133 Removing the Trigger Cover . 133
. 134 5.2.1 Attaching the Hand Strap - Model ST6025. 135
. 137 5.22 Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090. 5.2.3 Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 . 137
. 137
. 137 5.3.1 Snap Modules . 5.3.2 AC Wall Adaptor - Model ST1050-1
. 138 5.3.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . 139 5.4 Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . 140 Important Charger Safety Instructions . 140 5.4.1 5.4.2 Charging the Battery . 140 5.4.3 InstallationChargers and Docking Stations. 140 5.4.4 Operator Controls . 140 5.4.5 Power Consumption Considerations . 141 5.5 Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 . 141
. 142
. 143
. 143 5.5.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery . 143 5.5.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery . 143 5.5.4 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station . 143
. 144 5.5.5 Troubleshooting . 5.5.5.1 Docking station does not seem to power on. 144 5.5.5.2 Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. 144 5.5.5.3 Omnii charge indicator LED is red. 144 5.5.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. 144 5.5.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. 144 5.6 Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 . 145
. 145 5.6.1 Operator Controls . 5.6.2 Indicators . 145
. 5.6.3 Quad Docking Station Operation . 145 5.6.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery . 145 5.6.3.2 Installation. 145 5.6.3.3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network . 146
. 146
. 146 5.6.5.1 Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off. 146 5.6.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up . 146 5.6.5.3 Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow . 146 5.6.5.4 Omnii Charge Indicator LED Flashes Red . 147 5.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off . 147 5.6.4 Cleaning the ST4004 . 5.6.5 Troubleshooting . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 131 Regulatory Draft. 5.7.5.1 5.7 Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 . 147 5.7.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . 148
. 149 5.7.2 Wiring Guidelines . 5.7.3 Using the Vehicle Cradle . 149 5.7.4 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle. 149 5.7.5 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles. 149 Extreme Wet Environments . 149 5.7.6 Powered Cradle Installation . 150 5.7.7 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle . 150 5.8 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 . 151
. 151
. 151
. 152
. 152
. 152 5.8.5.1 Improper Battery Storage . 152 5.8.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up . 152 5.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . 152 5.8.1
. 5.8.2 Operator Controls . 5.8.3 Charge Indicators . 5.8.4 Charging Batteries. 5.8.5 Troubleshooting . Installation . 132 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 5.1 Pistol Grips There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of back cover and scanner/im-
ager installed in your hand-held. Refer to Table 5.1 for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the types of back covers and scanners/imagers with which they are compatible. Chapter 5: Accessories Pistol Grips Table 5.1 Pistol Grip Model Numbers Pistol Grip Description Model Number Pistol Grip Standard Pod Kit Pistol Grip Standard Back A Kit Pistol Grip Standard Back B Kit ST6000 ST6100 ST6400 5.1.1 Removing the Trigger Cover Before installing the pistol grip, you need to remove the trigger cover. Using a flathead screwdriver, gently and carefully pry the trigger cover off the hand-held. Figure 5.1 Removing the Trigger Cover 5.1.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly. The pistol grip is attached to the back of Omnii using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the Omnii casing (see Figure 5.2). Four M3x6 Phillips head screws are provided. Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the hand-held. Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip in place. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 133 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Carrying and Protective Accessories Figure 5.2 Attaching the Pistol Grip 5.2 Carrying and Protective Accessories Note: Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines. There are a variety of carrying and protective accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with Omnii. Attaching Carrying Accessories If your Omnii is not fitted with a hand strap, you can install it using the carrying accessory kit supplied. Youll need:
A Phillips head screwdriver. Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing. Table 5.2 Accessories Model Numbers Accessory Model Number Wrist Strap Hand Strap Soft Shell Holster Hard Shell Holster Forklift Holster Carrying Case ST6040 ST6025 ST6050 ST6055 ST6051 ST6090 134 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Attaching the Hand Strap - Model ST6025 Table 5.2 Accessories Model Numbers Accessory Model Number Pouch Screen Protector ST6091 ST6112 5.2.1 Attaching the Hand Strap - Model ST6025 Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the hand-held near the top of the unit (see Figure 5.3), using the two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory. Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the hand-held, and hook the clip at the bottom of the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack. Figure 5.3 Attaching the Hand Strap F Clip Hand Strap Slot Installation To lock the in place, insert the retaining clip in the slot at the bottom of the Omnii Hand-
Held Computer. (Figure 5.5) Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 135 Regulatory Draft 5.2.2 5.2.3 Chapter 5: Accessories Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090 Protective Carrying Case - Model ST6090 A carrying case is available for Omnii to shield the unit from damage. It is equipped with a soft plastic window to protect the unit display and keyboard. A variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap attached to your unit. Hard Shell Holster - Model ST6055 A hard shell holster can be used to hang Omnii with a pistol grip from your waist. Feed your belt through the top panel of the holster, and adjust the belt as needed. If using the leg tie-down strap, wrap it around your leg and snap the buckle closed. Adjust the tightness of the strap for security and comfort. Place Omnii into the holster with the grip extending back through the custom opening. Figure 5.8 Hard Shell Holster 5.3 Power Adaptor Options The following adaptors can be ordered for your Omnii:
Table 5.3 Power Adaptors Adaptor Description Model Number AC Wall Adaptor Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Snap Module Power/Charger Only Snap Module USB Host/Client plus Power/Charger Snap Module DE9M powered serial plus Charger ST1050-1 ST3113 ST4000 ST4001 ST4005 5.3.1 Snap Modules The Snap Module is a mobile power adaptor for Omnii. The Snap Module is compatible with the AC wall adaptor (Model ST1050-1) and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor (Model ST3113) Three types of Snap Modules are available:
Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): powers and charges the hand-held. Model ST4001 (USB Host/Client variant): powers and charges the hand-held. It provides communica-
tions via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port. When attached to Omnii, it allows ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center connectivity with your PC, and the use of a USB device such as a USB memory key or supported USB scanner. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 137 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories AC Wall Adaptor - Model ST1050-1 Model ST4005 (DE9M Serial variant): provides a powered DE9M serial connector. It powers and charges Omnii, and provides serial communications to tethered devices. The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to 115,200 bps. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to off. To enable power to this port, in your Omnii desktop, go to Control Panel>Scanners, which opens the Scanner Settings menus. In the Ports menu, select on for the Power parameter under the COM6 port. Figure 5.9 Snap Module Models and Installation ST4000 (Charger) Side Rail ST4001 (USB Host/Client) Locking Clip Hand Strap Slot DC IN Port ST4005 (DE9M Serial) To attach the adaptor to Omnii:
Make sure that the adaptor connector and Omnii docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them. A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of the adaptor. To attach the adaptor, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide up until the locking clips snap into place (Refer to Figure 5.9). To remove the adaptor, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the Omnii side rails and slide the adaptor off. Note:
If you are using a hand strap, there is no need to remove it before installing the Snap Module, since the Omnii hand strap slot will still be accessible. 5.3.2 AC Wall Adaptor - Model ST1050-1 The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station or Snap Module allows you to operate your hand-
held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit. Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions are shipped with the AC wall adaptor: United King-
dom, Australia, Europe and North America. 138 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Figure 5.10 AC Wall Adaptor Plugs Chapter 5: Accessories Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 Universal AC Power Supply DC Power Plug Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Univer-
sal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor. Insert the DC plug into the docking station or Snap Module jack. Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet. 5.3.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicles automotive power outlet when used in conjunction with a Snap Module. Figure 5.11 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor DC Power Plug Adaptor Plug Attach the USB Adaptor to the base of the hand-held. Refer to Snap Modules on page 137 if you require further details. Insert the DC power plug on the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor into the DC IN port on the USB adaptor. Insert the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle. Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 139 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information 5.4 Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information 5.4.1 Important Charger Safety Instructions Important: Before charging a battery with a desktop docking station, it is critical that you review the safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & War-
ranty Guide (PN 8000191). 5.4.2 Charging the Battery Omnii Hand-Held Computer operates with a lithium-ion battery pack, Model ST3000. Preparing the unit for operation requires that the battery pack be charged and installed in the hand-held. Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. Currently the following are available:
The Snap Module is a mobile adaptor for Omnii. Three models are availablesee Snap Modules on page 137. The AC Wall Adaptor operates as an AC power source and also charges the battery installed in the unitsee AC Wall Adaptor - Model ST1050-1 on page 138. The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor powers Omnii and recharges the battery using power drawn from your vehicles automotive power outletsee Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 on page 139. The Desktop Docking Stations operate as both chargers and docking stations. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in Omnii and a spare battery can be charged. Priority is given to charging the hand-held's battery. See Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 141. Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity. Table 5.4 Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times
% Charge Completed During Sleep Mode While Operating 100%
75%
4 hrs. 2 hrs. 8 hrs. 6 hrs. Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F). 5.4.3 InstallationChargers and Docking Stations When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines. Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room tempera-
turebetween 18C and 25C (64F to 77F) for maximum performance. After unpacking your unit:
Visually inspect the charger for possible damage. Install the IEC power cord and apply power. 5.4.4 Operator Controls Omnii docking stations and chargers have no operator controls. 140 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Power Consumption Considerations 5.4.5 Power Consumption Considerations Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for the load, es-
pecially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit. 5.5 Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003 Omnii can be inserted into two desktop docking stations which are designed to charge the battery installed in the hand-held along with a spare battery pack: Models ST4002 and ST4003. Important: These docking stations can only be used to charge Psion approved lithium-ion batteries. The ST4002 and ST4003 desktop docking stations feature:
Fast charging of the internal battery. Fast charging of the spare battery pack. A Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer, keyboard, etc. A Client USB port to connect the docking station to a PC. Note: The ST4002 desktop dock can be upgraded to include the DE9M and RJ45 interfaces by using the ST4100 Xmod (Expansion Module). The ST4003 desktop docking station additionally provides:
A DE9M serial port (unpowered) and an RJ45 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Both these interfaces are compatible with the USB to Ethernet/serial drivers included in Omnii (see Figure 5.13 on page 142). Figure 5.12 Desktop Docking Station - Models ST4002 and ST4003 Omnii Charge Well Release Button Spare Battery LED
(Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charge well of the docking station.) Note: The desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide (ST4002 and ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide, PN 8000203). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates. The desktop docking station storage temperature is -30C to +60C (-22F to 140F). Operating tempera-
ture and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 141 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii The desktop docking station uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensur-
ing the shortest possible charge time. The charger supports proprietary Psion Smart Batteries and handles a range of voltages and charge algorithms. See Battery Details on page 21 for more information regarding battery capacity, charge times and battery life. See Charging the Spare Battery on page 143 for spare battery charge information. Figure 5.13 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station Omnii Charge Well Locking Arm Connector Pins Spare Battery Charge Well Host USB Port DC IN Port RJ45 Ethernet Port Client USB Port DE9M Serial Port 5.5.1 Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet. Slide the hand-held into the docking station, making certain that the hand-held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins and engages the locking arms of the docking station. When the Omnii is switched on, a message is displayed briefly on the screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station and the docking station icon is displayed in the taskbar. The LED on Omnii lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in usethe battery will not be over-
charged. 142 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Indicators 5.5.2 Indicators The front-mounted LED on the desktop docking station indicates the spare battery charge status. The LED on Omnii is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily. Table 5.5 Docking Station Battery Charge LED Behaviour Charge LED Behaviour Function OFF Solid Green Flashing Green Flashing Yellow Solid Red No battery detected. Battery charging complete. Charge in progress. Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions. Unable to read battery or non Psion battery. 5.5.3 Operation 5.5.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery The desktop docking station supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger. When installed in the dock, the Omnii battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit has external power and can charge the internal battery. Omnii charge indication follows the same convention as the charger's spare battery indicator (Figure 5.12 on page 141). Note: Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off. 5.5.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery Important: Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity. Install the battery in the battery charge well (rear slot of the desktop docking station). Place the battery contacts down to mate with the connector, and pivot the battery into place in the battery charge well. The desktop docking station spare battery LED lights up immediately. During charge the LED will be flashing green. When the battery has finished charging, the LED turns solid green. A full charge will take 3 to 4 hours for a 5000 mAh battery. The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green. 5.5.4 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the desktop docking station. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions. To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 143 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Troubleshooting 5.5.5 Troubleshooting The indicators, applications, and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock
(as opposed to a charger) are installed on Omniino applications are present on the docking station itself. 5.5.5.1 Docking station does not seem to power on. When first connected to the DC power supply, the charger LED should flash a sequence of red, yellow, and green. If not, the charger is defective and requires service. 5.5.5.2 Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. When Omnii is docked into a powered desktop docking station and its charge indicator LED stays off, there could be a problem with the hand-held or with the docking station. Use a hand-held with a properly func-
tioning charge indicator to isolate the problem. 5.5.5.3 Omnii charge indicator LED is red. If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the hand-held is docked:
Remove Omnii and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable. Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again. If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, the hand-held requires service. 5.5.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger. If the charge slot LED continues to show red with the known working battery, the charger is defective and requires service. Your Psion battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity perform-
ance in accordance with IEEE 1725. If the battery or charger are not Psion approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the spare charge slot LED or the Omnii LED will display red. 5.5.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?). Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot. Try inserting a battery that you know to be working into the charger slot. Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power-up. If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and requires service. 144 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 5.6 Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 Important: The quad docking station is shipped with its own quick start guideOmnii ST4004 Quad Docking Station Quick Start Guide (PN 8000222). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates. Figure 5.14 Quad Docking Station Model No. ST4004 The ST4004 Quad Docking Station is designed to accept up to four Omnii hand-held computers. The docking station powers the units and their internal battery charger. The docking station also connects up to four of the hand-held computers to a 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer. 5.6.1 5.6.2 Operator Controls The ST4004 has no operator controls or power switch. Indicators The quad docking station is equipped with a Power Indicator LED. 5.6.3 Quad Docking Station Operation 5.6.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery Insert the DC power plug into the ST4004 rear DC input receptacle. The ST4004 supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger. Normally, a full charge of the battery will take from 3 to 4 hours. Insert up to four Omnii computers into the docking station charge wells, pressing down gently but firmly to seat them securely. During the charge, the Omnii LED slow flashes green. When the battery capacity reaches 95%, the LED turns solid green. Note: Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off. 5.6.3.2 Installation Place the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient tempera-
ture must be in the range 0 C and 40 C (32 F to 104 F). The docking station will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be oper-
ated at room temperaturea temperature range between 18C to 25C (64F to 77F). Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 145 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Cleaning the ST4004 5.6.3.3 Connecting to the Ethernet Network Figure 5.15 ST4004 Quad Docking Station Rear View RJ45 Ethernet ports DC In connector Network Access Omnii automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to commu-
nicate with the network. 5.6.4 Cleaning the ST4004 Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the ST4004. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions. To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol. 5.6.5 Troubleshooting 5.6.5.1 Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off When Omnii is docked in a powered ST4004 and the hand-held charge indicator LED stays off, there may be a problem with Omnii or with the docking station. Use an Omnii with a properly functioning charge indi-
cator to isolate the problem. 5.6.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up Remove all Omnii units, and unplug the docking station. Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power. Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage. Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet. 5.6.5.3 Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow A flashing yellow Omnii charge LED (the left-most LED on the hand-held) indicates that the battery is not within the allowable charging temperature range 0 C and 40 C (32 F to 104 F). Allow the battery to come to an acceptable range before reinserting Omnii in the docking station. 146 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 5.6.5.4 Omnii Charge Indicator LED Flashes Red Chapter 5: Accessories Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 If the Omnii charge indicator flashes red when Omnii is in any of the four sites, the quad dock cannot read the battery or it is not a Psion battery. Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again. Remove the computers and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable. If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, Omnii requires service. 5.6.5.5 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off Check the AC cable. Replace with the same type if the cable is suspect. If the adaptor LED stays OFF, the adaptor is defective and requires service. 5.7 Vehicle Cradles - Models ST1000 and ST1002 The Omnii vehicle cradles are highly ruggedized, single station docks. Although they provide quick insertion and removal, the cradles hold Omnii securely even when operated in high vibration environments (such as vehicles not equipped with suspensions). The Omnii vehicle cradle is available in two models:
Model ST1000 - Unpowered cradle. Model ST1002 - Powered cradle with commnications ports. A DE9M serial port (powered) and two USB Host interfaces. Figure 5.16 Front and Back of ST1002 with Omnii Psion also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand-held vehicle cradles, and the Omnii vehicle cradles are compatible with all of them. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 147 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 5.7.1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations Warning: Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruc-
tion, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer. Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion for assistance. Note also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage. Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehi-
cles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws. The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use the MT3326 or MT3327 brackets with the MT3324 (short arm) or MT3325 (standard arm) kit, using one of the following bases to secure the vehicle cradle/arm assembly to the vehicle:
VESA Plate - MT3501. Circular Plate - MT3502. Clamp Base (two sizes) - MT3505 and MT3507. Rail Base (two sizes) - MT3509 and MT3510. Figure 5.17 MT3325 Standard Arm Kit with Omnii Vehicle Cradle Omnii ST1002 Cradle
(powered) MT3325 Arm MT3326 Bracket To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the bottom of the cradle. Leave a 7" (minimum) clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand-held. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location
(Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide PN 8000221). 148 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 Chapter 5: Accessories Wiring Guidelines Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider the following:
Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring. Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage. Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal. Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled. Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards. Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle. Using the Vehicle Cradle If your Omnii is equipped with a cover, this accessory needs to be removed before in-
stalling the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove handstraps or pistol grips from the unit. Slide Omnii into the cradle, and press firmly downward until it locks into place. On a vehicle, its a good idea to pull up on Omnii to be certain that it is secure. To remove Omnii, press firmly on one of the knobs on either side of the cradle until it releases. You do not need to press both knobs. Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle Two latches in the cradle hold Omnii firmly in place. Although these latches are designed for at least 100,000 insertion and removal cycles, they will wear over time and will no longer lock Omnii securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion. Partial disassembly is required. 5.7.5 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles Warning: Voltages exceeding 30VDC are considered hazardous. Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 30VDC require special consideration, as listed below. Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator, and does not get exposed to water or other liquids. Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a haz-
ardous situation resulting in serious injury or death. Avoiding this hazard can be accomplished in the fol-
lowing way. Use the PS1300 or PS1350 pre-regulator. Ensure the power connector is wrapped securely with a waterproof electrical tape and installed in a dry location on the vehicle, away from the vehicle operators reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing). Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material (see Section 5.7.5.1: Extreme Wet Environments for additional details). All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehi-
cles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle. 5.7.5.1 Extreme Wet Environments For extreme wet environments, or environments where it is difficult to restrict vehicle operator access to the power connector, Psion offers a waterproof heat shrink kit (P/N 1030022). The kit contains 3 pieces of waterproof, high shrink ratio heat shrink tubing which can be used to encapsulate the entire connector as-
sembly. If using this kit, please ensure that you order sufficient material to cover installation and service, re-
membering that heat shrink is one-time use, and must be replaced if it is removed from the connector for any reason. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 149 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Powered Cradle Installation 5.7.6 Powered Cradle Installation The powered cradle option is designed to allow Omnii to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery in-
stalled in Omnii is also recharged by the vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources over the range 12V to 24V, voltages above that require the use of the preregulator (Model No. PS1350). Warning: Applying a voltage greater than that specified, or reversing polarity, may result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty. The Omnii vehicle cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed, or it can be retrofitted later at an authorized Psion service depot. The Omnii charging LED (see Battery Charge Status LED on page 28) indicates that external power is available, and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery. 5.7.7 Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle An optional 1.8 meter (6 foot) extension power cable (P/N 13985-301 with motion detect or 13985-302) is available for your powered vehicle cradle. This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 10A) ac-
cessory supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 4A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A. Note: When connecting P/N 13985-301 (Screen Blanking version), ensure that the screen blanking wires (clearly labelled) and the power wires (red/black leads) are reliably secured away from each other, or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation. A minimum 2.8mm distance, or 0.4mm distance through insulation, is required for the separation. The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the neg-
ative supplythis should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body. The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles. You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch. It is preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switchthat is, it cannot be turned on without the key on. However, if the opera-
tor switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch. Keep in mind that Omnii will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge. If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (P/N 19440-300) must be added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly. 150 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 5.8 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model ST3006 The ST3006 is designed to charge up to six Omnii lithium-ion batteries at one time. Important: Keep in mind when ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320 C13 power cord separately. Figure 5.18 ST3006 Battery Charger 5.8.1 Installation The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031) or it can be operated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient tempera-
ture must be in the range 5C to 39C (41F to 102F). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperaturea temperature range between 18C to 25C (64F to 77F). The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit). After unpacking the unit:
Visually check the charger for damage. Install the IEC power cord and apply power. Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding. All charge indicators flash momentarily at power up to indicate that the charger is ready for operation. If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the Omnii 6-Slot Battery Charger ST3006 Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204) included with the charger kit. Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity. 5.8.2 Operator Controls The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 151 Regulatory Draft Chapter 5: Accessories Charge Indicators 5.8.3 Charge Indicators Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery. When the Omnii batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge. Table 5.6 Charge Status Indicator LEDs Charge LED Behaviour Function OFF Solid Green Flashing Green Flashing Yellow Solid Red No battery detected. Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity. Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity. Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions. Unable to read battery or non Psion battery. 5.8.4 Charging Batteries Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place. The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED shows charging is under way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately. If the battery temperature is outside 5C to 39C (41F to 102F), the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take from 3 to 4 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green. When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot. 5.8.5 Troubleshooting 5.8.5.1 Improper Battery Storage Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not recommended. Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time. See the battery handling recommendations in The Battery on page 14. 5.8.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger. Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power. Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage. Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet. 5.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot. Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot. Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken). Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot. Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at power up. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual 152 Regulatory Draft A APPENDIX: PORT PINOUTS APort Pinouts
. A-3 A.1 Omnii Docking Connector . A.2 Snap Modules Connectors . A-4 A.3 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 . A-5
. A-6 A.4 Omnii Battery Contacts . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft A.1 Omnii Docking Connector The docking interface on the base of Omnii is custom-designed to dock with a device via an array of spring-
mounted pins. Appendix A: Port Pinouts Omnii Docking Connector The following are the pin assignments of the interface. Table A.1 Docking Connector Pinout Pin #
Signal Pin #
Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GROUND DC_IN DOCK_LOW_PWR GROUND USB_OTG_VBUS CHARGE_IN GROUND DC_IN USBH_P USBH_M 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 USB_OTG_P USB_OTG_M CHARGE_IN GROUND DC_IN UART_RX GROUND UART_TX CHARGE_DATA GROUND Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix A: Port Pinouts Snap Modules Connectors A.2 Snap Modules Connectors Model ST4000 (Charger only variant): power and charge. Model ST4001 (USB Host/Client variant): power, charge, communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors, DC IN port. Model ST4005 (DE9M Serial variant): powered DE9M serial connector, power, charge, serial communi-
cations. Pin 9 is reserved for 5V 1A max power out and is defaulted to off. ST4001 ST4005 USB Micro B connector
(USB device/ActiveSync) USB Type A connector
(USB host) Powered DE9M serial port The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces. Table A.2 Snap Modules Connectors Pinout ST4001 ST4005 USB Micro B Connector USB Type A Connector DE9M Serial Connector Pin #
Signal Pin #
Signal Pin #
Signal 1 2 3 4 5 VCC D-
D+
ID GROUND 1 2 3 4 5 6 VBus D-
D+
GROUND SHIELD SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DCD RXD TXD DTR GROUND DSR RTS CTS 5Vdc 1A power out A-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix A: Port Pinouts Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 A.3 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44-pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable (DE9M serial port, 2 USB Host interfaces, and power cable) or the power-only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable. For installation details, see Powered Cradle Installation on page 150. ST1002 Vehicle Cradle CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable 44-pin connector DE9M serial port USB Type A connectors
(USB host) Power connector The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces. Table A.3 CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Cable Connectors Pinout USB Type A DE9M Serial Power Pin #
Signal Pin #
Signal Pin #
Signal 1 2 3 4 VBus D-
D+
DGROUND 1 2 3 4 VIN GND (not chassis ground) MOTION DETECT MOTION DETECT RETURN (not ground) 1 2 3 4 VIN (11.5 to 30Vdc) GND (not chassis ground) MOTION DETECT MOTION DETECT RETURN
(not ground) Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix A: Port Pinouts Omnii Battery Contacts A.4 Omnii Battery Contacts Figure A.1 Battery Contact Pinout 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Table A.4 Battery Contact Pinout Pin #
Signal Name Description BATT-RAW Positive lead of battery. Plastic Rip - provides mechanical polarity. BATT-RAW BATT-CLK BATT-ID BATT-DATA GND GND Positive lead of battery. SMBus data clock. 0 to NEG. SMBus bi-directional data line. Negative lead of battery. Negative lead of battery. 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 A-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft B APPENDIX: IMAGER &
CAMERA SETTINGS BImager & Camera Settings B.1 Required Applets. B.2 Presets . B.3 Using the Imagers Applet. Selecting a Camera. B-3
. B-3
. B.2.1 Predefined Presets . B-3 B.2.2 Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu) . B-3 B.2.2.1 Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . B-4 B.2.2.2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets . B-4 B.2.3 Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) . B-4
. B-5 B.3.1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) . B-5 B.3.1.1
. B-5 B.3.1.2 Setting the Active Preset . B-5 B.3.1.3 Viewing a Preset . B-6 B.3.1.4 Creating a Custom Preset . B-6 B.3.1.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . B-6 B.3.1.6 Removing a Custom Preset . B-7 B.3.2 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) . B-7 B.3.2.1 Selecting a Camera. B-8 B.3.2.2 Setting the Active Preset . B-8 B.3.2.3 Viewing a Preset . B-8 B.3.2.4 Creating a Custom Preset . B-9 B.3.2.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . B-9 B.3.2.6 Removing a Custom Preset . B-10 B.3.3 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) . B-10 B.3.3.1 Setting the Active Preset . B-11 B.3.3.2 Viewing a Preset . B-11 B.3.3.3 Creating a Custom Preset . B-11 B.3.3.4 Modifying a Custom Preset . B-12 B.3.3.5 Removing a Custom Preset . B-13 B.3.4 Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies. B-13
. B-13 B.3.5 Filter Menu Manipulating Barcode Data . B.3.5.1 Modifying a Barcode Setting . B-13 B.3.6 Translation Menu Configuring Rules . B-14 B.3.7 Advanced Menu . B-15 B.3.7.1 File Locations for Captured Images . B-15 B.3.7.2 Configuring Triggers . B-15
. B-16 B.4.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies . B-17 B.4.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies . B-18
. B.4 Barcode Symbologies . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Required Applets The Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings. The principal uses of the application are to decode barcodes and to capture images. This imager services application is used for cameras and imagers to configure linear (1D), stacked linear, matrix (true 2D) and postal barcodes. A Dem-
onstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to Demo on page 37 for details. Required Applets B.1 In order to configure imaging, the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the Control Panel, along with the Imagers applet. Note: The Imagers icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed. To enable a newly-installed imager, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. B.2 Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Imagers applet:
Use a predefined preset. Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset. Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome. A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a spe-
cific purpose such as barcode decoding or image capture. Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or resume from suspend. The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only specified barcodes, read only a specified number of bar-
codes or for reading unusual media. Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:
At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected active preset. Imaging for photo capture. Imaging for barcode decoding. Symbology selection. Predefined Presets Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous var-
iables. In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient. Barcode Predefined Presets (Barcoding Menu) These presets encompass the majority of the most popular barcodes and their subtypes. The barcode de-
coding symbology predefined presets define which barcodes can be decoded. The barcode decoding camera predefined presets determine how the barcode images are captured. B.2.1 B.2.2 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) B.2.2.1 Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets The following presets select groups of similar barcodes for decoding. Note:
It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible. My Default This preset uses the Symbology Settings menu to define the preset. For details about the Symbology Set-
tings menu, refer to Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies on page B-13. Factory Default This preset enables the decoding of frequently used barcodes. All This preset enables the decoding of all barcodes that the imager can decode. Linear This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode. Linear and PDF417 This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode. Matrix This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode. Postal This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode. B.2.2.2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful barcode image capture in almost all conditions. Note:
It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible. Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux). Low Light This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain. Low Power This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the hand-held. Glossy Surface This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to read barcodes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope. B.2.3 Image Capture Predefined Presets (Imaging Menu) The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions. Note:
It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible. Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting (about 300 Lux). B-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Using the Imagers Applet Motion This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion. Low Light Near This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash. Using the Imagers Applet Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel Tap on the Imagers
. icon, and if its not already selected, tap on the Imaging tab. B.3 B.3.1 The following screen is displayed. Figure B.1 Imaging Menu This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified as follows:
Predefined presets are marked as R read-only. Custom presets are marked as RW read and write. One preseteither predefined or customis marked as A active. B.3.1.1 Selecting a Camera To select a camera:
Tap on the Camera Presets Choose a cameraspecifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit. drop-down menu to view the camera options. B.3.1.2 Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right. To set an active preset:
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Image Capture Presets (Imaging Menu) B.3.1.3 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset:
The associated preset window is displayed. Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button. Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings. B.3.1.4 Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preseteither a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
A screen like the sample below is displayed. Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button. Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box. Tap on OK The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write. to save your changes. B.3.1.5 Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button. B-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings. Tap on the +
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change. For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click on the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided. For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values. When youve completed your edits, tap on OK. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown. to exit to the preset list and save the changes. Tap on OK B.3.1.6 Removing a Custom Preset Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset. to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation. Tap on Yes B.3.2 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) To configure the barcode decoding camera presets:
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Imagers Tap on the Barcoding tab. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-7 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) Figure B.2 Camera Presets Note: The top portion of the window displays the barcode decoding camera presets. This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as follows:
Predefined presets are marked as read-only. For a description, review Predefined Presets on page B-
3. Predefined presets are marked as R read-only. Custom presets are marked as RW read and write. One preseteither predefined or customis marked as A active. B.3.2.1 Selecting a Camera To select a camera:
Tap on the Camera Presets drop-down menu to view the camera options. Choose a camera specifically, Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit. B.3.2.2 Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.3 on page B-11, the active preset is Default. To set an active preset:
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button. B.3.2.3 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset:
The associated preset window is displayed. Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button. B-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets (Barcoding Menu) Tap on the +
sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings. B.3.2.4 Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preseteither a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
A screen like the sample following is displayed. Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button. Type the name Tap on OK of the new preset in the dialog box. The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write. to save your changes. B.3.2.5 Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-9 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change. For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided. For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values. When youve completed your edits, tap on OK. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown. to exit to the preset list and save the changes. Tap on OK B.3.2.6 Removing a Custom Preset Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset. to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation. Tap on Yes B.3.3 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) To configure the barcode decoding camera presets:
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel>Imagers
. Tap on the Barcoding tab. B-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) Figure B.3 Viewing Barcode Decoding Symbologies Note: The bottom portion of the window displays the barcode decoding barcode presets. B.3.3.1 Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right; in Figure B.3 on page 11, the active preset is Default. To set an active preset:
Highlight the preset, and tap on the Activate button. B.3.3.2 Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset:
The associated preset window is displayed. Highlight a preset, and double-tap on the View button. Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings. B.3.3.3 Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preseteither a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
A screen like the sample following is displayed. Highlight a preset, and tap on the Add button. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-11 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies (Barcoding Menu) Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box. Tap on OK The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write. to save your changes. B.3.3.4 Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
Highlight the custom preset, and double-tap on the Edit button. Tap on the + symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings. Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change. For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided. For a parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values. When youve completed your edits, tap on OK. The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown. to exit to the preset list and save the changes. Tap on OK B-12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft B.3.3.5 Removing a Custom Preset Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset. to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation. Tap on Yes B.3.4 Tap on the Barcoding tab, highlight All and then double-tap the View button. Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies To view the Symbology Settings options:
To edit a default preset, you must first activate it:
Once the preset is activated, you can enable or disable the barcodes the imager will read. None of the other barcode decoding predefined presets are changed. Highlight My Default in the Barcoding tab. Double-tap on the Edit button. Tap on My Default
, and tap on the Activate button an A appears to the right of My Default. B.3.4.1 Symbology Settings Note: For descriptions of the barcode symbologies, review Barcode Symbologies on page B-
16. B.3.5 Filter Menu Manipulating Barcode Data To configure rules for manipulating barcode data:
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel Tap on the Imagers
. icon, and then tap on the Filter tab. B.3.5.1 Modifying a Barcode Setting symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings. The rules for manipulating data from selected barcode symbologies can be modified. To change the set-
tings for a symbology:
Tap on the +
Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change. For a parameter that can take a range of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the [SPACE] key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-13 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Translation Menu Configuring Rules
- Type a value in the field provided. For a parameter that takes a single character:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the [SPACE] key, or double-click the parameter. The follow-
ing screen is displayed:
When youve completed your edits, tap on OK. B.3.6 Translation Menu Configuring Rules Translation rules enable the automatic processing of barcode data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each con-
sisting of up to 10 sequential rules. Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Scanner Control Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in either place affect both translation tables. Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel Tap on the Imagers icon, and then tap on the Translations tab. For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to Translations on page 102. B-14 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft B.3.7 Advanced Menu B.3.7.1 File Locations for Captured Images Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Advanced Menu To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:
Tap on Start>Settings>Control Panel Tap on the icon, and then tap on the Advanced tab. Imagers
. To define the location where imager files will be stored:
Tap on the File Location button. Type the file Name, choose the Folder and file Type. Choose the Location in which your files will be saved. When you have completed all the changes, tap on the Save button. B.3.7.2 Configuring Triggers Viewing the Trigger Configuration The trigger on Omnii is configured using the Manage Triggers applet. The Imagers applet provides a short-
cut to the Manage Triggers applet. In the Advanced tab, tap on the Trigger Control button. To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in the checkbox next to Show all modules. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-15 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Barcode Symbologies Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to Manage Triggers on page 81. Barcode Symbologies B.4 There are two sets of barcode symbologies, one for Imager and one for Color Camera. To display the bar-
codes available:
In the Imager & Camera Settings screen, go to the Barcoding tab. In the Camera Presets: drop-down menu at the top of the Imager & Camera Settings screen, choose Imager or Color Camera depending on which set of barcodes you want to work with. Go to the Barcode Presets. B-16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Imager Barcode Symbologies Tap on an Barcode Preset to display the barcode symbologies. B.4.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies The barcode symbologies for the Imager are listed in this section. Table B.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-E UPC-A UPC/EAN Sharing Settings Code 93 (disabled) MSI Plessey (disabled) Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-17 Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Color Camera Barcode Symbologies Table B.1 Imager Barcode Symbologies Code 11 (disabled) Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled) Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled) Telepen (disabled) Gs1 DataBar (disabled) TLC-39 (disabled) 2D PDF-417 2D micro PDF-417 CodaBlock F (disabled) CodaBlock A (disabled) 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode (disabled) 2D Aztec (disabled) Postal: PlanNET (disabled) Postal: PostNET (disabled) Postal: China (disabled) Postal: Japanese (disabled) Postal: Kix (disabled) Postal: Royal (disabled) Gs1 B.4.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies The barcode symbologies for the Color Camera are listed in this section. Table B.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-E UPC-A Code 93 (disabled) Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) Gs1 DataBar (disabled) B-18 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings Color Camera Barcode Symbologies Table B.2 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies Gs1 Composite 2D PDF-417 2D micro PDF-417 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode (disabled) 2D Aztec (disabled) Postal: PlanNET (disabled) Postal: PostNET (disabled) Postal: Australia (disabled) Postal: Canadian (disabled) Postal: Japanese (disabled) Postal: Kix (disabled) Postal: Korean (disabled) Postal: Royal (disabled) Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-19 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft C APPENDIX: SCANNER SETTINGS CScanner Settings C.1 Barcode Settings. C.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanners . Scanner Options . C.1.1
. C.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . C-3
. C-3
. C-3
. 4
. 5 C.2.1 Options . 5 C.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options . 6 C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) Data Options . 7
. 7
. 7 C.4.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options . 8 C.4.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . 9 10
. C.3 Decoded (HHP). C.4 Decoded (Intermec ISCP) . C.5 Non-Decoded Scanners . C.5.1 Options . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft C.1 Barcode Settings The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner con-
figurations and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize. Appendix C: Scanner Settings Barcode Settings The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit. For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter E: Omnii Specifications. Important: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds. For information on configuring the Options, Translations, and Ports settings, see Scanners on page 98. C.1.1 Scanner Options The drop-down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held: Decoded (internal), Decoded
(HHP), Decoded (Intermec ISCP, and Non-decoded Scanners. The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports. Always defer to your barcode scanners programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter. Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel, under the System Properties tab. Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to on) only those codes that are required by the application. Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes. C.1.2 Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters. Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop up a menu. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (Internal) Scanners Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings. To reset a single parameter to its default setting:
Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset. C.2 Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting. Decoded (Internal) Scanners Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (internal). C-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix C: Scanner Settings Options C.2.1 Options Note: Some options are available only for specific scanners. Refer to the option names in this sec-
tion for scanner model identification. Dot Time (msec) The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec, 200 msec or 400 msec. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot. Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99. The value is measured in tenths of seconds. C.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options Scan Mode You can set the method of scanning by setting this parameter to Scan beam only, Aim with Scan: 1 trigger pull, Aim with Scan: 2 trigger pulls, Aim with Scan on trigger release, and Continuous Scan Mode. Default is Scan beam only. Aim Duration This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 (0 to 3 sec.). A value of 0 (zero) disables the aiming-dot. Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off. Power Mode This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options:
Continuous Power and Low Power. In Continuous Power mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or serial communication. In Low Power mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applica-
tions, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a barcode. Low Power Timeout To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanneda successful decode restores normal flashing. This is only used if the units Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On. If the unit is used in a fixed mount this parameter might be used, but not if the unit is used as a hand-held. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min. or 3 min. Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and Omnii is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, Low Power Timeout is not used. Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter barcodes. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (Internal) Data Options Linear Security Level This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your barcode quality. There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As security levels increase, the scanners decode speed decreases. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4. Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Code Type Length Codabar MSI Plessey D 5 of 5 I 2 of 5 All 4 or less 8 or less 8 or less Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being de-
coded. Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type Length MSI Plessey D 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 4 or less 8 or less 8 or less Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded. Bi-Direction Redundancy Note: This parameter is only valid if a Linear Security Level is enabled. When this parameter is enabled, a barcode must be successfully scanned in both directions (forward and re-
verse) before being decoded. C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) Data Options Transmit Code ID Char A code ID character identifies the scanned barcode type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code:
None, AIM or Symbol. Scan Data Format This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format. Double-tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format: data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data [S1], [P] data [S2] and
[P] data [S1][S2]. Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] and Suffix [S2]
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing. When you double-
tap on these parameters, dialog boxes are displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255. C-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (HHP) Delete Char Set ECIs Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECIs (Extended Channel Interpretations [also known as GLIs]) from its buffer before transmission. When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 barcodes con-
taining Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled. ECI Decoder Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs. If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data. The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table C.1. Table C.1 Code 39 Trioptic Code (disabled) Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-A UPC-E Decoded (Internal) Barcode Symbologies UPC/EAN Shared Settings Code 93 (disabled) Codabar (disabled) MSI Plessey (disabled) Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) Discrete 2 f 5 (disabled) Gs1 DataBar (disabled) C.3 Decoded (HHP) To configure imagers, please see Appendix B: Imager & Camera Settings. Decoded (Intermec ISCP) C.4 Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Decoded (Intermec ISCP). C.4.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-7 Regulatory Draft Appendix C: Scanner Settings Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds. C.4.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down. Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off. Low Power Timeout To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanneda successful decode restores normal flashing. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, or 3 min. Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the unit is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, Low Power Timeout is not used. Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter barcodes. Same Read Validate The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at this parame-
ter determines the number of reads required, from 0 to 10 times. Same Read Timeout Prevents the same barcode from being read more than once. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec. Diff Read Timeout Prevents unwanted reading of other barcodes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from 0 to 2550 msec. Add AIM ID Prefix The AIM ID (Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international barcode identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the AIM ID is inserted at the beginning of the decoded barcode. C-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table C.2. Appendix C: Scanner Settings Non-Decoded Scanners Table C.2 Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-A UPC-E UPC/EAN Shared Settings Code 93 (disabled) Codabar (disabled) MSI Plessey (disabled) Code 11 (disabled) Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled) Decoded (Intermec ISCP) Barcode Symbologies TLC-39 (disabled) 2D PDF-417 2D micro PDF-417 Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled) Telepen (disabled) Gs1 DataBar (disabled) Composite TLC-39 (disabled) PDF-417 micro PDF-417 (disabled) CodaBlock F (disabled) CodaBlock A (disabled) C.5 Non-Decoded Scanners Figure C.1 Non-Decoded Scanner Options Tap on the Scanner drop-down menu, and choose Non-decoded. All the available barcode symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab. A plus sign (+) to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub-menu of parameters is attached. Tap on the +
To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter. If you need to type a value, a dialog box is displayed in which you can type a new value. If you need to change a yes or no value, double-tapping on the parameter toggles between yes and no. sign to display the sub-menu. If youre using the keyboard:
Highlight the barcode you want to work with, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu. Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to highlight a parameter. To change a parameter value, press [SPACE] or the [RIGHT] arrow key. If a field requires text entry, a text box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-9 Regulatory Draft Appendix C: Scanner Settings Options C.5.1 Options Tap on the + sign next to Options to display these parameters. Dot Time (msec) The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 3000. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot. Short Code When enabled, this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 barcodes (2 characters). When disabled, these short barcodes are rejected. Enabling Short Code may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand-held must decode more potential barcodes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose barcodes with 4 or more charac-
ters. Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode, prior to a barcode being accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a barcode but also improve the reliability of the decoded barcode. Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge barcodes (Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the barcode. The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting. The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in Table C.3. Table C.3 Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC-A UPC-E Codabar (disabled) Non-Decoded Barcode Symbologies Code 93 (disabled) Code 11 (disabled) Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled) MSI Plessey (disabled) Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled) IATA 2 of 5 (disabled) C-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft D INTERNAL IMAGER &
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS DInternal Imager & Scanner Specifications
. D.1.1 D.1 SE955 Scanner. D.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones . D.2.1 SE 1223LR Decode Zone . SE955 Decode Zones . D-3
. D-3 D.2 SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner. D-4
. D-4 D.3 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner . D-5
. D-5
. D-6
. D-6
. D-7
. D-7
. D-8 D.6.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances . D-8
. D-9 EA20X Typical Reading Distances . D-9
. D-10
. D-10
. D.4 SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner . D.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . D.8.1 HHP 5080 Working Range . D.4.1 SE1524ER Decode Zones . D.8 HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder . D.6 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager . D.7 EA20X Imager . D.5 EV15 Imager . D.7.1
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE955 Scanner This appendix lists specifications for the following internal scanners. For a current list of model numbers and descriptions for Omnii scanner pod and back cover kits, please contact your Psion representative or go to http://www.psion.com/us/products/handheld/omniit10_accessories.htm. SE955 Scanner D.1 Parameter SE955 Configuration Scan Rate Scan Angle Voltage Ambient Light:
Laser Safety Electrical Safety EMI/RFI Environmental Decoded 104 ( 12) scans/sec (bidirectional) 47 3 default / 35 3 reduced 3.0-3.6 V 10%;
5 V 10%
10,000 ft. candles IEC 60825 UL 60950, EN/IEC 60950 FCC Part 15 Class B, EN 55024/CISPR 22, AS 3548, VCCI RoHS Compliant D.1.1 SE955 Decode Zones Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner D.2 SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner Parameter SE1223LR Light Source Scan Rate Scan Angle Scan Patterns Visible Laser Diode 650 nm 35 ( 5) scans/sec (bi-directional) 23 2 Linear Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 40% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm. Symbologies Supported Programmable Parameters UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI, UCC/EAN 128, TriOptic Code 39. Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting, Serial Parameters, Beeper Tone. Ambient Light Power Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux). Sunlight: 8,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux). Input Voltage: 5.0 VDC 10%
Input Current: 115 mA typical Standby Current: 70 A max. Laser Classification Intended for use in CDRH Class II and IEC Class 2 devices Electrical Safety Environmental UL, VDE, and CUL recognized component laser RoHS-compliant D.2.1 SE 1223LR Decode Zone Table D.1 4,844 Lux to 86,112 Lux Minimum Range Inches Width of Field Inches Maximum Range Inches Width of Field Inches Mil Size 10 15 20 40 55 70 reflective 100 reflective 11 7.5 7.5 10 10 48 60 2 1 1 2 2 High quality symbols in normal room light. 24 39 48 90 120 200 240 5 8 10 19 24 40 48 D-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft D.3 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner Parameter SE1224HP Type Light Source Scan Rate Laser Class 2 Visible Laser Diode 650 nm 35 ( 5) scans/sec (bi-directional) Scan Angle/Field of View 42 (typical), 30 (narrow) Scan Patterns Linear Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm. Symbologies UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Dis-
crete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI. Programmable Parameters Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting. Ambient Light Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4844 Lux). Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles (86112 Lux). Laser Output Power (peak) 1.35 mW D.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner D.4 SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner Parameter Specification Type Light Source Scan Rate Laser Class 2 Visible Laser Diode 650 nm 35 (5) scans/sec (bi-directional). Scan Angle/Field of View 13.5 0.7 Scan Patterns Linear Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at 650 nm. Symbologies UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC.EAN128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI. Programmable Parameters Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting. Ambient Light Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux) Sunlight: 4,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux). Laser Output Power (peak) 1.26 mW D.4.1 SE1524ER Decode Zones SE1524ER Decode Zone A (Short Range, Small Codes) D-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft SE1524ER Decode Zone B (Long Range, Large Codes) Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications EV15 Imager D.5 EV15 Imager Parameter Specification Light Source Scan Angle 617 nm highly visible LED 40 Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25%
Minimum X. Dimension 0.1 mm (4 mils) Reading Distance Symbologies Up to 90 cm (35 in) UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Inter-
leaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417, Micro PDF417 Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux D.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone 0 Lux to 100,000 Lux Mil Size Minimum Range Inches Maximum Range Inches 5 10 UPC 20 40 2.5 3 2 2.5 3 High quality symbols in normal room light. 7 14 14.5 22 35.5 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-7 Regulatory Draft Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications EA11 Decoded 2D Imager D.6 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager Parameter Specification Scan Rate 2D mode: 56 images/s auto adaptive Linear Emulation Mode 200 scans/s auto adaptive Scan Angle 38.9 (horizontal), 25.4 (vertical) Optical Resolution 752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels Print Contrast Versions Symbologies - 1D Symbologies - 2D Voltage (optics) down to 25%
Standard range and high density EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post) Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codes 3.3V -5% / +10% (typical values) Operating Current 170mA - 310mA (lighting condition dependent) Power Saving Mode 2mA Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux Regulatory Approvals UL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant D.6.1 EA11 Typical Reading Distances D-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications EA20X Imager D.7 EA20X Imager Parameter Light Source Scan Rate Specification 617nm highly visible LED, 650nm laser framing/aiming 2D mode: 60 images/s auto adaptive Linear Emulation Mode 200 scans/s auto adaptive Scan Angle 26.0 (horizontal), 16.8 (vertical) Framing Angles 25.0 (horizontal), 16.0 (vertical) Optical Resolution 752 (H) x 480 (V) pixels, 256 gray levels Print Contrast down to 30% on 1D, 35% on 2D Minimum Resolution 1D symbologies 0.15 mm (6 mil), Stacked (PDF417) 0.17 (6.6 mil) and 2D matrix 0.18 (7mil) Symbologies - 1D Symbologies - 2D EAN/UPC, GS1 Databar (limited expanded & omni-directional), RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved/Matrix/ Industrial and Standard 2 of 5, Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, postal codes (Australian Post, BPO, Canada Post, Dutch Post, Japan Post, PostNet, Sweden Post) Data Matrix, PDF417, Micro PDF 417, Codablock Maxicode, QR, Aztec GS1 composite codes Voltage 3.3V 5%
Operating Current 410mA @ 3.3V scanning with power save Power Saving Mode 7mA Ambient Light From 0 to 100,000 lux Regulatory Approvals UL, cUL, VDE certified, RoHS compliant, Class 2 Laser D.7.1 EA20X Typical Reading Distances Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-9 Regulatory Draft Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder D.8 HHP 5080 Imager/Decoder Parameter Specification Focal Point - SR Focal Point - SF Image Sensor Motion Tolerance Rotational Sensitivity Viewing Angle Ambient Light 7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate 4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from lens plate 752 x 480 CMOS sensor 4 inches per second 360 40 Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight) Illumination LEDs 626 nm 30 nm Aiming LEDs: 526 nm 30 nm Laser: 650 nm 10 nm Input Voltage - Imager 3.3 VDC 5% (23C) Input Voltage - HHP 5080 3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23C) Current Draw - Imager Max. Operating Current: 100 mA; Standby Current: 100 A Current Draw - HHP 5080 Average Current (Interlaced Mode): 510 mA; Standby Current: 120 A ;
Peak: 600 mA Symbologies:
2 Dimensional Linear Postal PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code, Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2 of 5, Reduced Space Symbology, Code 93, Codablock Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post, Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post D.8.1 HHP 5080 Working Range Data is characterized at 23C (73.4F) and 0 lux ambient light. Symbology Size (mil) Near Far SR Linear PDF417 UPC Data Matrix QR MaxiCode SF PDF417 Linear Data Matrix QR Linear UPC 8.3 (.020cm) 3.5 in. (8.9cm) 10 (.025cm) 13 (.033cm) 15 (.038cm) 15 (.038cm) 35 (.089cm) 6.6 (.017cm) 7.5 (.019cm) 12.5 (.021cm) 8.3 (.021cm) 10 Linear 13 (.033cm) 3.1 in. (7.9cm) 2.1 in. (5.3cm) 2.3 in. (5.8cm) 3.1 in. (7.9cm) 2.0 in. (5.1cm) 2.8 in. (7.1cm) 2.5 in. (6.4cm) 3.4 in. (8.6cm) 3.4 in. (8.6cm) 2.2 in. (5.6cm) 2.0 in. (5.1cm) 7.6 in. (19.3cm) 9 in. (22.9cm) 13.2 in. (33.5cm) 10.2 in. (25.9cm) 8.8 in. (22.4cm) 13.0 in. (33cm) 6 in. (15.2cm) 6.5 in. (16.5cm) 5.7 in. (14.5cm) 5.4 in. (13.7cm) 7.6 in. (19.3cm) 8.9 in. (22.6cm) D-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft E APPENDIX: OMNII SPECIFICATIONS EOmnii Specifications
. E.1.1 Hardware . E.1.2 Approvals . E.1 The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) . E-3
. E-3
. E-4 E.2 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000) . E-5
. E-6 E.3 Wireless Radios. E.3.1 Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . E-6 E.3.2 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio . E 7 E.3.3 802.11a/b/g/n Radio . E-9
. E-10
. E.3.4 Bluetooth Radio . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) E.1 The Omnii Hand-Held Computer (Model 7545) Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice. E.1.1 Hardware Physical Dimensions Overall: 100 mm width x 42 mm depth x 230 mm length (3.9 in x 1.6 in x 9 in). Keypad area: 75 mm width x 32 mm depth (2.9 in x 1.3 in). Weight With battery pack, EV15 imager, and high impact display 760 g (26.8 oz.) Processor and Memory Texas Instruments OMAP3 Processor 800 MHz RAM: 256 MB RAM. Flash Memory: configurable from 512 MB to 16 GB. User Interface Colour Touch Display:
Keyboards:
Indicators And Controls:
Side Buttons:
Audio:
Vibration:
9.4 cm (3.7 in.) diagonal. VGA/QVGA, 480 x 640 resolution. High visibility version: superior sunlight visibility. High Impact version: withstands 1.25 Joule impact. Backlit, high durability hard-capped keys. Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats. For a list of currently available keyboard configurations, see the Keyboard and Keypads Kits list in the Accessories chapter. Four multi-colour LEDs indicate the status of the battery, application, radio, and scanner. Volume, Scan, Enter, Vertical Scroll. High volume beeper: 95 dBA Integrated Microphone/Speaker. Optional PTT Speaker. Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk: VoIP over Wi-Fi You can set Omnii to vibrate as a result of a successful or unsuccessful barcode scan. Power Management Rated Voltage: 5 VDC Rated Current: 3 A. Battery Pack: lithium-ion 5000 mAh capacity with 9-hour life under normal operating conditions (for battery specifications, see Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000) on page E-5). Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge. 3 power source options: Runs off battery, AC power, or automotive power supplies. Backup power: 5 minutes. Communication Expansion Ports:
SIM Card slot. MicroSD slot for Flash expansion. Multiple Internal Multi-Function Expansion Interfaces with:
- 3v3 TTL serial
- USB host
- GPIO Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Approvals Camera The optional camera has the following features:
Colour. 3 Megapixel. Autofocus. Manual digital 4x zoom. 2xLED flash. Video capable (optional with or without PTT speaker). Environmental Standard Operating Temperature: -20C to +50C (-4F to 122F) Storage Temperature:
-40C to +60C (-40F to 140F) Long exposure to temperatures below -40C (-40F) may damage the screen and main battery. Prolonged exposure to temperatures above
+60C (+140F) will damage the main battery, and temperatures above
+70C (+158F) may damage the unit. IEC 60529, classification IP65. 5% - 95% RH non-condensing
+/- 8 kV contact, +/- 15 kV air discharge. Rain And Dust Resistance:
Humidity:
ESD:
Omnii RT15 Drop Durability: 1.5 m (5 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accesso-
ries); multiple 1.8 m (6 ft.) drops to polished concrete. Omnii XT15 Drop Durability: 1.7 m (5.6 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered on, with accesso-
ries); multiple 2.0 m (6.5 ft.) drops to polished concrete. E.1.2 Approvals Safety:
EMC:
Laser:
Bluetooth:
RF:
RoHS compliant:
IEC 60950-1 FCC Part 15 Class B EN 55022 EN 55024 EN 301 489 IEC 60825-1 Ed. 2.0, Class 1, Class 2 FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 1040.11 Class I, Class II 2.0 Bluetooth and 802.11a/b/g/n: EN300 328, Part 15.247 EU Directive 2002/95/EC E-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000) E.2 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000) For safety instructions, please see Lithium-ion Battery Safety Precautions in the Omnii Hand-Held Com-
puter Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191). Parameter Specification Model Number ST3000 Chemistry Capacity Battery Life Voltage lithium-ion (Li-Ion) 5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20C to 3.0 V (min) 9 hours, under normal operating conditions. 3.7 V nominal (3.0 V min. to 4.2 V max.) Cell Configuration 2 P1S (2 parallel connected cells) Max. Charge Voltage 4.2 V +/- 1%
Recommended Charge Termination Timeout 5.0 hr - charging must stop. Charge Temperature 0C to +40C (32F to +104F) Discharge Temperature
-20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) Storage Temperature Cycle Life
-20C to +50C (-4F to +122 F). Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended. 25C (77 F)recommended storage temperature. 300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70% of nominal capacity based on 0.5C charge / 0.5C discharge rates (to 3.0 V) @
23C (73.4 F). Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Wireless Radios E.3 E.3.1 Wireless Radios Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio Parameter Specification Manufacturer Form Factor Output Power Control via AT Commands Cinterion, Model MC75i Quad-Band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 MHz EDGE (E-GPRS) multi-slot class 12 GPRS multi-slot class 12 GSM release 99 Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM850 Class 4 (2 W) for EGSM900 Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1800 Class 1 (1 W) for GSM1900 Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005 Supply Voltage Range 3.2 to 4.3 V EDGE Data Transmission GPRS Data Transmission CSD Data Transmission SMS Voice Interfaces EDGE class 12: max 236.8 kbps (downlink) Mobile station class B Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1-9 GPRS class 12 Mobile station class B PBCCH support Coding schemes CS 1-4 Up to 14.4 kbps, V.110 Non-transparent mode Point-to-point MO and MT Text and PDU mode Triple-rate codec for HR, FR, and EFR Adaptive multi-rate AMR Basic hands-free operation Echo cancellation Noise reduction Hirose U.FL-R-SMT 50 ohm antenna connector Antenna solder pad Molex 80-pin board-to-board connector:
Power supply Audio: 2x analog, 1x digital Serial interface (ITU-T V.24 protocol) SIM card interface 3 V, 1.8 V E-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio E.3.2 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio Table E.1 Feature General Specifications Frequency bands GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900MHz UMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/AWS/1900/2100MHz GSM class Small MS Output power (according to Release 99) HSPA features 3GPP Release 6, 7 UMTS features 3GPP Release 4 GSM/GPRS/EGPRS features Data transfer Class 4 (+33dBm 2dB) for EGSM850 Class 4 (+33dBm 2dB) for EGSM900 Class 1 (+30dBm 2dB) for GSM1800 Class 1 (+30dBm 2dB) for GSM1900 Class E2 (+27dBm 3dB) for GSM 850 8-PSK Class E2 (+27dBm 3dB) for GSM 900 8-PSK Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSK Class E2 (+26dBm +3 /-4dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSK Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 2100, WCDMA FDD Bd I Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 1900,WCDMA FDD Bd II Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS AWS, WCDMA FDD Bd IV Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 850, WCDMA FDD Bd V Class 3 (+24dBm +1/-3dB) for UMTS 800, WCDMA FDD Bd VI DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7Mbps UE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supported Compressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP TS25.212 PS data rate - 384 kbps DL / 384 kbps UL CS data rate - 64 kbps DL / 64 kbps UL GPRS:
Multislot Class 10 Full PBCCH support Mobile Station Class B Coding Scheme 1 - 4 EGPRS:
Multislot Class 10 EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK Downlink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9 Uplink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9 SRB loopback and test mode B 8-bit, 11-bit RACH PBCCH support 1 phase/2 phase access procedures Link adaptation and IR NACC, extended UL TBF Mobile Station Class B CSD:
V.110, RLP, non-transparent 14.4kbps USSD Point-to-point MT and MO SMS Protocol Modes General GPS features NMEA Assisted GPS (control plane AGPS, E911) Power saving modes GPS tracking in parallel to 2G/3G diversity operation Software AT commands Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005, and proprietary Cinterion Wireless Modules commands Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual E-7 Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE Radio Table E.1 Feature SIM Application Toolkit SAT Release 99 Audio Interfaces Antenna USB SIM Application Toolkit SAT Release 99 Specifications Audio speech codecs GSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR 3GPP: AMR Speakerphone operation, echo cancellation, noise suppression 50Ohms. Main GSM/UMTS antenna, UMTS diversity antenna, GPS antenna
(active/passive) USB 2.0 High Speed (480Mbit/s) device interface UICC interface Supported chip cards: UICC/SIM/USIM 3V, 1.8V Special features Phonebook Antenna SIM and phone SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) / DARP (Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance) RX diversity type 3i E-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications 802.11a/b/g/n Radio E.3.3 802.11a/b/g/n Radio Parameter Sub-parameter Specification Manufacturer Form Factor Murata, Model LBEH1Z9PFC Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio Antenna Port 802.11b/g/n U.FL jack. Non-diversity. Multiplexed between 802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz) and Bluetooth radio 802.11a/n U.FL jack. Non-diversity. Antenna Type 802.11b/g/n PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR 802.11a/n PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 5150-5860 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR Antenna Gain 802.11b/g/n Transmit Power 802.11a/n 802.11b 802.11g 802.11a 1.9 dBi 1.9 dBi
+18 dBm typical, +19.5 dBm max
+13 dBm typical, +14.5 dBm max
+12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max 802.11n (2.4 GHz)
+12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max 802.11n (5 GHz)
+12 dBm typical, +13.5 dBm max Frequency Range 802.11b/g/n 2400-2483.5 MHz Channels RX Sensitivity Data Rates EVM Bluetooth Coexistence 802.11a/n 802.11b/g/n 802.11a/n 802.11b 802.11g 802.11a 5150-5350 MHz, 5480-5720 MHz and 5725-5845 MHz 1 to 14. Up to 14 channels (depending on country). Only 3 channels are non-overlapping. 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140 149, 153, 157, 161, 165 Up to 24 channels (depending on country). All channels are non-overlapping.
-78 dBm @ 11 Mbps
-67 dBm @ 54 Mbps
-67 dBm @ 54 Mbps 802.11n (2.4 GHz)
-66 dBm @ 65 Mbps 802.11n (5 GHz)
-66 dBm @ 65 Mbps 802.11b 802.11a/g 802.11n 802.11b 802.11g 802.11a 1,2,5.5,11 Mbps 6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps 6.5,13,19.5,26,39,52,58.5,65 Mbps 32% max
-26 dB max
-26 dB max 802.11n (2.4 GHz)
-29 dB max 802.11n (5 GHz)
-29 dB max TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme. E-9 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix E: Omnii Specifications Bluetooth Radio E.3.4 Bluetooth Radio Parameter Specification Manufacturer Form Factor Antenna Port Antenna Type Antenna Gain Murata, Model LBEH1Z9PFC Embedded surface mount module, 11.4 x 9.4 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V2.1+EDR radio U.FL jack (shared with Wi-Fi 802.11b/g/n radio) PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR 1.9 dBi Transmit Power 6.5 dBm typical, 8.5 dBm max Frequency Range 2.400-2.4835 GHz Channels RX Sensitivity Data Rates 79
-90 dBm typical, -70 dBm max V1.2=732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps symmetric V2.0=2 & 3 Mbps 802.11 Coexistence TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi-BT co-existent scheme. E-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft F APPENDIX: WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK
(WWAN) SETTINGS FWireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings F.1 Wireless WAN. F.1.1 F.1.2 F.1.3 Advanced Information . F.1.4 Tools Menu . F.1.3.1 F.1.3.2
. Taskbar Icons . Establishing a Connection . F.1.2.1 F.1.2.2
. F-3
. F-3
. F-3 Disconnecting From a Network . F-4 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface . F-5
. F-5 Entering a PIN Number . F-5 Error States . F-5
. F-6
. Data Configuration . F-6 F.1.4.1 F.1.4.2 Security Configuration. F-9 F.1.4.3 Network Configuration. F-9 F.1.4.4 Driver Mode Configuration . F-10 F.1.4.5 Modem Information . F-11
. F.1.4.6 User Interface . F-11
. F-12
. F-12
. F.1.5.1
. F-12
. F.1.5.2
. F-13 F.1.5.3 Outbox . F.1.5.4 SMS Configuration . F-13
. F-13
. F-13
. New . Inbox . F.1.5 SMS Menu. F.1.6 Voice. F.2 Power Mode . Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Wireless WAN F.1 Wireless WAN The Omnii is available with one of the following Wireless WAN (WWAN) radio options: the MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE and Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE. An Omnii Hand-Held Computer equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With either of these radios and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the Omnii voice option to place phone calls. F.1.1 Taskbar Icons Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection. Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM/GPRS radio is installed in the computer, and the interface is enabled. The following taskbar icons are used:
User interaction is required (e.g. the user is required to enter a PIN). G - GSM/GPRS E - GSM/EDGE A non-recoverable (fatal) error has occurred. The modem status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network (the signal strength is 0%). The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 1% and 20%. The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 21% and 40%. The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 41% and 60%. The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 61% and 80%. The modem has found a network, and the signal strength is between 81% and 100%. Once the modem detects that a packet data service is available, a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the kind of packet data service. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available, or if it is available but not yet initialized. For example:
The modem has found a network, the signal strength is between 41% and 60%, and GSM/GPRS packet service is available. The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data connection is started:
A GPRS packet data connection is active. In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown. A new SMS (Short Message Service) message has arrived. The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available (SIM card and GPRS radio are installed). When you have an active call, this icon flashes yellow, and then green. F.1.2 Double-tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar. Establishing a Connection To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box:
If the icon is not visible in the taskbar, the radio interface has been shut down or the modem has been re-
moved:
In the Control Panel, choose the Wireless WAN icon. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Establishing a Connection The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed. Figure F.1 Establishing a Connection Note:
If you are prompted to enter a PIN, refer toEntering a PIN Number on page F-5 for details. Tap on the Connect Data button. When Ready to connect is displayed in the Status field, the Connect Data button is enabled. The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field. Connecting. PPP link to modem active. Authenticating user. User authenticated. Connected. Note: Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connec-
tion is rapid. When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active, the taskbar icon changes to indicate an active connection. The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect. F.1.2.1 Disconnecting From a Network Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button, and then on OK. To disconnect from the network:
When the computers network connection is severed, the Status field displays Ready to connect. The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen, even while a connection is active. The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and received, respectively. F-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Advanced Information F.1.2.2 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface While it is not usual to shut down the GSM/GPRS user interface, you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main Wireless WAN dialog box. Note: Once youve shut down the user interface, you can only enable the radio by opening the Con-
trol Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless WAN dialog box. F.1.3 Advanced Information In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer, setup is automatic. Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing a Connection on page F-3 to make a connection. The in-
formation in this section is for advanced setup purposes. F.1.3.1 Entering a PIN Number If a PIN is required, a PIN entry dialog box is displayed. Type your PIN, and press [ENTER]. Note:
If you exceed the number of allowable attempts, a PUK entry window is brought to the fore-
ground. Youll need to enter a new PIN number. Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required, the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach. The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization. If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network, the following states are repeated: Searching for network, Registered on network, Searching for packet data, and Ready to connect. Searching for modem. Initializing modem. SIM is ready. Searching for network. Registered on network. Searching for GPRS. Ready to connect. F.1.3.2 Error States The following temporary error states (i.e., these states may disappear without interaction) may be dis-
played:
Emergency calls only. The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register (e.g. no roaming agreement between networks). The modem keeps searching for another network. No network found. A network is not currently available. The modem continues searching for a network. Packet data not available. The current network does not support a packet data service. Packet data not allowed. The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network (e.g. no GPRS roaming agreement between network; a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place). It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for GPRS at all. The remaining error states are permanent:
SIM is missing. The SIM card is missing. After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required. SIM failure. The SIM card is permanently disabled (e.g. because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times). A new SIM is needed. Modem failure. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Tools Menu The modem did not respond to commands as expected. If a warm boot does not clear this condition, the modem may need to be replaced. NDIS error. An internal software error has occurred. If a warm boot does not clear this condition, Psion technical support may need to investigate further. F.1.4 Tools Menu The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional, advanced setup features. F.1.4.1 Data Configuration Enable Automatic Connect If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked (unchecked by default), the Wireless WAN user inter-
face will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is available (e.g. after resume from suspend without further user interaction). To activate the automatic connection mode:
While automatic connection mode is enabled, the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto. To close the currently active connection (if any) and disable the automatic con-
nection mode:
Tap on the OK button. Tap on Disable Auto. F-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Tools Menu Important: Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface (e.g. Connection Manager) are expected to open and close connections. If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the GPRS connection, the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re-establish the connection. Use Virtual Serial Port If Use virtual serial port is enabled, packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly. This checkbox should only be checked if certain third-party VPN (Virtual Private Network) clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise. The default setting is disabled (unchecked). Note: The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port. Enable Automatic Configuration In most cases, the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is required. This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device. The connection pa-
rameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected (this may require a warm boot). The connection parameters are retrieved from a database. Manual configuration should be necessary only if:
One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database.
(The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.) An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords. A very large site has its own APN. Such connections always have to be configured manually. A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be configured manually. An operator may use a different APN for certain groups of customers. Since the automatic configura-
tion can configure only one APN per operator such connections have to be configured manually. Profiles In the following section, all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection (such as APN, user name, password, DNS server addresses etc.) are referred to as a profile. Every profile is identified by an ar-
bitrary, unique name. The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted. The Default profile uses parameters from a built-in database. The home network (the network that issued the SIM) is used for the database look-up. While there can be many configured profiles, only one profile can be active at any time. If connection profiles are configured manually, the Enable automatic configuration checkbox should nor-
mally be unchecked. In one particular use case, manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration. If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device, each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile, automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card. For this to work, each profile must be config-
ured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized (i.e. the status is at least Searching for network). The Select profile: drop-down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a subsequent action applies. A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the da-
tabase. The following actions are available:
Show The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button. For the Default profile, the publicly known password is shownotherwise, the password is hidden. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-7 Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Tools Menu Edit The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button. Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile. Delete The selected profile is deleted. You cannot delete the Default profile. Activate When this button is chosen, the selected profile becomes the active profile. Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration: checkbox is unchecked. New Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile. Figure F.2 Creating a New Profile The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles. Also, the name cannot be Default. When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened, a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corre-
sponding entry field. If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered, the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead. In this case, you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated (the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected). If Force PAP authentication (Password Authentication Proto-
col) is enabled, a simple authentication protocol is used to authenticate a user to a remote access server or Internet Service Provider. Reset The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened. F-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Tools Menu Advanced IP Figure F.3 Assigning IP Information The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS fields so that you can specify DNS and WINS resolvers. F.1.4.2 Security Configuration The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu. The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable, disable and change the PIN. You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes. The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed. (If the PIN is disabled, the New PIN entry field is greyed out.) Note: Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled. A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits. The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings. By default, this check-
box is unchecked. While this option remains unchecked, any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted. This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN (such as resume after suspend or modem removal). The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up. If unauthorized access to the device is a concern, the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked. In this case, the PIN is not stored; whenever a PIN is required, you will be prompted to enter an appropriate value. F.1.4.3 Network Configuration In the main Wireless WAN window:
Tap on the Tools menu, and choose Network. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-9 Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Tools Menu By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agree-
ment). You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For ex-
ample, you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements. In this case, youll need to manually select the network which you know to support GPRS roaming. Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box. When automatic network selection is disabled, you must select a network manually. Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings. Scanning for available networks is a lengthy operationa progress bar is shown while the scan is active. For every network that is found, the network name, country, status and numeric network identifier (MCC/MNC, Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code) is displayed. Note: Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an Available status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS. A status of Forbidden indicates that the network cannot be used. If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement, the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to Emergency calls only, No network found, GPRS not available or GPRS not allowed. F.1.4.4 Driver Mode Configuration By default, the Wireless WAN driver is enabled (the Enable driver checkbox is checked). The driver must be disabled in order to use the modem for anything other than GPRS (e.g. dial-up data, fax, or in order to man-
ually submit AT commands to the modem for development, testing, approvals, etc.). If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked, the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen. If, on the other hand, the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver checkbox is checked, the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button. Note: When the driver is not running, no network status or signal strength can be displayed. Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected, the Enable automatic port detec-
tion checkbox should always be checked. If this checkbox is not checked, a serial port can be selected man-
ually. This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not F-10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Tools Menu recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the compu-
ter through USB or through Bluetooth. An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115.2 kbit/s, 8bit, no parity and hardware flow control. F.1.4.5 Modem Information The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited, they only display information about the computers modem. If the network operator has not programmed a users phone number into his SIM, the Phone: field remains empty. If the main menu shows an error status, at least partial modem information may be available. F.1.4.6 User Interface Taskbar Choosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN icons will be dis-
played in the taskbar. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-11 Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings SMS Menu Sounds Tapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which sounds your Omnii will emit and when these sounds will be played. F.1.5 SMS Menu SMS (Short Message Service) functions are accessed through the SMS menu. For modems that support a SIM card, the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization, resulting in a noticea-
ble delay before the SMS functions become available. F.1.5.1 New Tapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message. The recipient's phone number
(to be entered in the To: field) can consist of the digits 0 through 9, as well as the * and # characters, op-
tionally preceded by one + character, indicating an international number (i.e. the country code follows im-
mediately after the + character). By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent. If no storage space is available, or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages, then this checkbox is disabled. F.1.5.2 Inbox Tapping on the Inbox button opens the list of received messages. Reading 50 messages, for example, from the SIM can take about 30 seconds. By default the list of messages is sorted with the most recently re-
ceived message first. The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading. Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order. Tapping on any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number. F-12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix F: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Settings Voice Note: The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu in Con-
trol Panel. For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be closed and re-
opened. The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read in-
cluding the original formatting (line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list). Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above, except the destination phone number is filled in already. F.1.5.3 Outbox Tapping on the Outbox button opens the list of sent messages. Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above. The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems. F.1.5.4 SMS Configuration Tapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog. The SMS Centre address follows the same rules as the recipient's phone number in the New message dialog. The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient (the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting). Note: Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value. The next time the SMS configuration dialog is opened the rounded value is shown. The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the Delete oldest message when full checkbox is checked. In this case, when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full, the oldest received message is deleted. If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix, then messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox. In this way messages intended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user, as long as those messages begin with the string configured here. F.1.6 F.2 Voice The Voice tab is described in detail under Voice Communication on page 17. Power Mode The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel (not through the Wireless WAN user interface). See WWAN Power Mode on page 88. For PC Card and CF Card modems, the settings are found under the Card Slots tab. If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked, no power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded (neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver). If the checkbox is checked, power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the computer is turned on. Power is removed from the modem when the computer enters suspend mode. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual F-13 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft G APPENDIX: WIRELESS ZERO CONFIG SETTINGS GWireless Zero Config Settings
. G.1 Wireless Information . G.2 Assigning An IP Address . G.2.1 Name Server . G.3 Advanced Features . G.1.1 Wireless Statistics . G.1.2 Wireless Information . G-3
. G-3
. G-4
. G-6
. G-6
. G-7 G.3.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks . G-7 G.3.2 Deleting A Preferred Network . G-7 G.3.3 Changing Network Properties . G-7
. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-1 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings Wireless Information G.1 Wireless Information Wireless Zero Config, the Windows native supplicant, can be used to configure the radio. To ensure that Wireless Zero Config is activated, refer to Wi-Fi Config: Advanced on page 128. Tap on Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections. Choose the radio icon representing the radio you want to set upin the sample screen in Figure G.4, this is labelled as SDIO86861 Figure G.4 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings Window G.1.1 Wireless Statistics When you choose the Wireless LAN icon, an 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings window is displayed. This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four itemsPackets IN, Packets OUT, IN errors and OUT errors. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-3 Regulatory Draft Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings Wireless Information Figure G.5 Wireless Statistics G.1.2 Wireless Information This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network. Configure button: To change the settings in an existing network, highlight the network you want to modify, and tap on the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box. Connect button: To force connection to a specific, existing network, highlight the network to which you want Omnii to connect, and tap on the Connect button. Figure G.6 Wireless Information This tab lists available networksany access points that are broadcasting an SSID, and it lists preferred net-
worksnetworks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here. By default, Omnii attempts to connect to preferred networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to non-preferred networks in the Advanced dialog box (see Figure G.9). To add a new configuration, tap on the Add New button. A blank Wireless Properties dialog box is displayed. G-4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings Wireless Information Wireless Properties Figure G.7 Wireless Properties Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the Network name (SSID): dialog box. The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network. Important: Keep in mind that Omnii will only communicate with access points that are config-
ured with the same SSID. Ad Hoc And Infrastructure: If you are using an Infrastructure networkone in which the hand-helds must pass data through an access pointleave the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network blank. If you are using an Ad Hoc networka network in which the hand-helds pass data directly to other Ad Hoc devices without an access pointadd a checkmark in the checkbox next to This is an ad hoc network to enable Ad Hoc. Encryption: WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose Disabled from the drop-down encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a standard for protecting data through encryption. AES sup-
ports key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a replacement for the Data Encryption Standard (DES), which has a key size of 56 bits. In addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes, the AES algorithm is a symmetrical block cipher that can encrypt (encipher) and decrypt (decipher) information. Authentication: 802.11 supports several subtypes of network authentication services: Open, Shared, WPA, and WPA-PSK. Under Open authentication, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station. Under Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. Under WPA and WPA-PSK authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is required. For wireless net-
works without a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentica-
tion Protocol (EAP) and RADIUS is supported. Network Key: This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point. To assign a Network key, highlight The key is provided automatically, and uncheck the checkbox to disable this option. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-5 Regulatory Draft Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings Assigning An IP Address Figure G.8 Network Key and Key Index Key Index: This field is used to identify the WEP key. Enter a value from 1 to 4. Enable 802.1x authentication: 802.1X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS or MD5 encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802.1X standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed in the drop-down menu next to the EAP option. To activate 802.1X, highlight 802.1x authentication, and check the checkbox. EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol): This drop-down menu lists the EAP types available on your system. The items in this drop-down menu will vary depending on your network setup. Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate. By selecting the Properties button, you will be able to select a Certificate. Certificates on page 63 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network. Saving and exiting the radio setup: Once youve completed the configuration, press [ENTER], or tap on OK. The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network. The radio will search for the SSID and compare the WEP and authentication information you specified. If there is a match between the hand-held settings and the access point settings, the hand-held will com-
municate on the network through the access point. G.2 Assigning An IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. Refer to IP Address on page 126 for details about assigning an IP address. G.2.1 Name Server Refer to Name Server on page 128 for details about this option. G-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft G.3 Advanced Features Appendix G: Wireless Zero Config Settings Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box:
This window lists the available preferred networks. Tap on the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab. (Refer to Figure G.6.) G.3.1 G.3.2 G.3.3 Figure G.9 Advanced Wireless Settings Rearranging Preferred Networks Omnii attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networksmove networks up and down in the list:
Tap in the Networks List, and highlight the network that you want to move up or down in the list. To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, tap on the Up or Down button. Deleting A Preferred Network To delete a network from this list:
button. In the preferred networks list, highlight the network you want to remove. Tap on the Delete Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network:
Highlight the network that you want to modify. Tap on the Properties Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box, and press [ENTER] to save the changes. button. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual G-7 Regulatory Draft Regulatory Draft Numbers 1D internal scanner 32, 33 2D imager 33 36-key keyboard alpha keys, accessing 26 uppercase letters, creating 26 7545 Model See Omnii E-3 802.11a/b/g/n radio E-9 802.11b/g radio configuring 121129 A accessories carrying case 137 desktop docking stations 141 Ethernet cable 146 hand strap 134, 135 holster, hard shell 137 pistol grip 133 quad docking station 145 vehicle cradle 147 AC Wall adaptor 138 Administrator Password (PsionVU settings) 93 AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) 70 Aim Duration C-5 aiming dot, duration of C-5, C-10 All Predefined preset B-4 ALT Key 23 appearance (display colour scheme) 65 appending to barcodes characters 101 App Launch Keys 53 approvals, Omnii (including scanner) E-4 arrow keys moving the cursor 23 audio indicators adjusting volume 30 description of beep conditions 30 B background, choosing for Desktop 96 background image (display scheme) 65 backlight Backspace (DEL Key) 23 backup Profile (Total Recall) display 66 intensity 26 creating 111 restoring 113 viewing 113 Bad Scan Vibrates 102 barcode appending to 101 decodes required C-10 decoding edge-to-edge C-10 Decoding symbology predefined presets B-3 displaying type of barcode 101 parameters 99, C-3 INDEX INDEX integrated scanner, operation of 31 Security C-10 Translation tab 102 barcode reader bar code symbologies color camera D17, D18 imager D17 battery 21 Advanced dialog box 87 Battery Health dialog box 88 Built-in Devices dialog box 88 capacity dialog box 85 charger safety instructions 140 charging 14, 21, 140 charging with desktop docking station 143 contact pinout A-6 estimated battery backup time 87 installing 14 power saving suspend dialog box 86 replacing 14 specifications E-5 ST3006 6-slot battery charger 151152 Suspend Threshold dialog box 87 swap time 21 taskbar icon 29 Baud, port replicator 105 beeper adjusting volume 30 description of beep conditions 30 Bi-Direction Redundancy C-6 Bluetooth radio devices, pairing 57 GPRS setup 60 ISM band 54 radio configuration 5463 setup 54 specifications E-10 Boot to BooSt 16 Bright For (backlight) 66 C cable diagrams A-1 calibrating touchscreen 26, 109 Call Lists 117 Call Management 119 camera specifications E-4 camera, using 90 camera settings 71 case, carrying 137 chargers 140 desktop docking station 141 indicators 143 installing at a site 140 operation 143 operator controls 140 safety instructions 140 Snap Modules 137 ST4004 operator controls 145 ST4004 quad docking station 145 troubleshooting 146 Cinterion MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual I Regulatory Draft Index PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-7 Ethernet connection (quad docking station) 146 clean start 16 Click Data (scanner double-click) 101 Click Time (scanner double-click) 101 Codepage 102 Command Prompt 37 communication computer hardware properties 110 conference calls, creating 119 Continuous Scan Mode C-8 Control Panel accessing 49 App Launch Keys icon 53 Display Properties 65 icons 50 keyboard properties 73 power management properties 85 Predefined presets B-3 stylus properties 109 Control Panel Settings (PsionVU settings) 97 cradle See also vehicle cradle 147 CTRL Key 23 Custom preset B-3 cycle tasks 39 D Data Bits, port replicator 105 decoded (internal) scanner parameters C-4 decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters C-7 decoded scanners C-9 decoding barcodes decodes required C-10 Security C-10 DEL (Backspace) Key 23 Delete Char Set ECIs C-7 Demo Scanner 37 Signature 37 Sound 37 Desktop background, choosing 96 desktop connection, remote 98 desktop docking station See docking station, desktop 141 desktop shell appearance 41 desktop themes 96 dialer (phone), using 17, 116 dialing, phone number 17, 116, 117 Diff Read Timeout C-8 Dim For (backlight) 66 dismounting partitions 107 display appearance (colour scheme) 65 background (image) 65 backlight 66 backlight, adjusting 26 Display Properties 65 display font size 116 Display Properties 65 docking device icons 30 docking station 140141 desktop 141144 cleaning 143 indicators 143 operation 143 operator controls 140 troubleshooting 144 installation at site 140 ST4004, quad operator controls 145 uploading data using 64 docking stations quad docking station (ST4004) 145 Dot Time C-5, C-10 double-click appending characters to a decodedarcode 101 scanner trigger 101 Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu 82 Double-Tap (stylus settings) 109 Dr. Debug 66 E EA11 2D Imager specifications D-8 EA20X scanner specifications D-9 ECI Decoder C-7 Error Reporting 68 ESC Key 23 Ethernet, connecting with docking station 146 EV15 1D imager scanner specifications D-7 F font size, display (Registry Editor) 116 formatting entire memory card 106 partitions 107 FTP Server, Registry Editor 114 Function Keys 36-key keyboard 25 59-key keyboard 25 G gang charger 151152 Glossy surface, Predefined preset B-4 Good Scan Beep 101 Good Scan Vibrates 102 GPRS (Bluetooth) 60 GPS Settings (built-in profiles) 68 Group, preset B-3 GSM/EDGE F-3 GSM/GPRS F-3F-13 GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-7 H hand strap 134 hand strap, installing 135 Hard Reset 16 hard reset 16 headsets, pairing (Bluetooth) 57 HHP 5080 imager specifications D-10 holster, hard shell 137 I I 2 of 5 Short Code C-10 Identifier, Default preset group (imaging software) B-3 imager EV15 specifications D-7 HHP 5080 specifications D-10 two dimensional (2D) imager 33 Imager & Camera settings 71 Imagers applet B-1 Import/Export to File (PsionVU settings) 97 II Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft indicators 802.11 radio signal quality 29 battery 29 docking devices 30 LED functions 27 modifier keys 29 onscreen 29 scanner message 32, 33 task bar 35 Ingenuity (PsionVU Shell), settings 96 input panel (Control Panel) 51 installation hand strap 135 pistol grip 133 Snap Modules 137 vehicle cradle 147 integrated scanner option 31 Intensity (7035 backlighting) 66, 74 Internet Explorer 37 IPv6 115 ISM band, Bluetooth radio 54 K keyboard 36-key keyboard 26 alpha keys, 36-key keyboard 26 backlight 74 key repeat 73, 74 One Shot Mode 75 onscreen, Microsoft SIP 72 Properties 73 keyboard keys 22 ALT 23 arrow keys 23 Backspace 23 CTRL 23 DEL 23 ESC 23 function keys, accessing 25 macro keys 25, 75 modifiers 23 navigating using the keyboard 34 SCAN 23 SHIFT 22, 23 SPACE 23 Tab 23 Key Repeat tab 73 L Laser On Time C-5, C-7 LED charge 28 functions 27 scan 28 troubleshooting quad dock ST4004 146 Linear Predefined preset B-4 Linear and PDF Predefined preset B-4 Linear Security Level C-6 Lithium-ion batteries installing 14 removing 14 Lock Sequence 80 Low light Predefined preset B-4 Low light near Index Predefined preset B-5 Low power Predefined preset B-4 Low Power Timeout C-5, C-8 M Macro keys 36-key keyboard 25 59-key keyboard 25 accessing 25 executing a macro 76, 77 Macros menu, accessing 75 recording and saving 75 maintenance 43 Manage Triggers 81 Matrix Predefined preset B-4 creating partitions 106 formatting entire 106 formatting partition 107 messages Scan Indicator 101 scanner warning message 101 Scan Result 101 MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-6 memory card microphone adjustments 120 microphone gain adjustment 83 microSD Card, inserting 30 Microsoft ActiveSync 64 Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) 72 Minimum Cancel Time C-5, C-8 Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting up 65 modem using VPN clients F-7 modifier keys 23 locking 24 One Shot Mode 75 unlocking 24 Motion, Predefined preset B-5 mounting partitions 108 Multiple Beep Tones 101 N network connection, monitoring 129 O Omnii approvals E-4 model numbers 4 specifications E-3 Omnii RT15 specifications E-3 Omnii XT15 specifications E-3 On & Off button 15 one dimensional internal scanner 32, 33 One Shot Mode 75 ON For 74 onscreen keyboard, Soft Input Panel (SIP) 51, 72 Open TekTerm application 84 operating system properties 110 P pairing Bluetooth devices 57 Parameter Scanning C-5, C-8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual III Regulatory Draft Index Parity, port replicator 105 partitions creating 106 deleting 107 dismounting 107 formatting 107 management 107 mounting 108 PDF and linear Predefined preset B-4 PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-7 phone, dialing 17, 116 Phonebook 119 phone number, dialing 17, 116, 117 picker cradle, installing cable 149 Pictures deleting 92 editing 92 opening 91 pictures 90 pinouts A-1 pistol grip, installing 133 pocket PC compatibility 85 port pinouts A-1 Port Replicator settings (COM5 and COM6) Power Mode Decoded (Internal) Scanner C-5 Predefined preset B-3 Baud 105 Data Bits 105 Parity 105 Port B (COM6), Power 104 Stop Bits 105 Trigger On Sequence 105 ports Postal Power parameters 104 Predefined preset B-4 Properties 85 Source 86 to Port B (COM6) 104 Power Management Properties Advanced 87 battery capacity 85 Battery Health 88 Built-in Devices 88 suspend, power saving 86 Suspend Threshold 87 All B-4 Glossy surface B-4 imaging software B-4 Linear B-4 Linear and PDF B-4 Low light B-4 Low light near B-5 Low power B-4 Matrix B-4 Motion B-5 Postal B-4 Prefix C-6 Preset (imaging software) Custom B-3 Group B-3 Predefined B-3 creating backup 111 restoring backup 113 viewing backup 113 Programs Command Prompt 37 Preset Group, Default identifier (imaging software) B-3 Profile IV Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Internet Explorer 37 Remote Desktop Connection 37 Windows Explorer 37 protective case 137 Psion Camera 90 PsionVU menus 93 PsionVU settings Administrator Password 93 Control Panel Settings 97 Import/Export to File 97 Restrictions 96 Shell Settings 94 PsionVU Shell 41 punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key) 22, 23 R radio 802.11 signal quality 29 Bluetooth 5463 Cinterion PH8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio specifications E-7 specifications 802.11a/b/g/n E-9 Bluetooth E-10 MC75i GSM/GPRS/EDGE E-6 recalibrating touchscreen 26, 109 Registry Editor 114 Advanced Interface and Network 115 Remote Desktop Connection 37, 98 Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 74 menu (key repeat settings) 73 Rate (of key repeats) 74 resetting Omnii Boot to BooSt 16 clean start 16 Hard Reset 16 hard reset 16 warm reset 16 Restrictions (PsionVU settings) 96 return-to-factory warranty 1iii Run (Start Menu) 40 S safety instructions battery charger 140 scanner 31 safety warning, scanner 31 Same Read Timeout C-8 Same Read Validate C-8 Scan Data Format C-6 Scan Indicator 101 SCAN Key 23 Scan Log File 102 Scan Mode C-5 scanner Aim Duration C-5 aiming (target) dot duration C-5, C-10 aiming dot duration C-5 appending data 101 Bad Scan Vibrates 102 barcode, appending data to 101 Bi-Direction Redundancy C-6 Click Data (appending data) 101 Click Time (double-click) 101 Codepage 102 Continuous Scan Mode C-8 Regulatory Draft decoded C-9 decoded (internal) C-4 decoded Intermec (ISCP) C-7 Delete Char Set ECIs C-7 Dot Time C-5 double-click 101 EA11 2D Imager specifications D-8 ECI Decoder C-7 Good Scan Beep 101 Good Scan Vibrates 102 Laser On Time C-5, C-7 Linear Security Level C-6 Low Power Timeout C-5, C-8 Minimum Cancel Time C-5, C-8 Multiple Beep Tones 101 one dimensional (1D) internal scanner 32, 33 Parameter Scanning C-5, C-8 ports parameters 104 Prefix C-6 safety warnings 31 Scan Data Format C-6 scan failure, codepage 102 Scan Indicator 101 Scan Log File 102 Scan Mode C-5 Scan Result Time 101 SE 1223LR specifications D-4 SE 1224HP specifications D-5 SE 1524 ER specifications D-6 SE955 specifications D-3 Security C-10 Short Code C-10 Soft Scan Timeout 102 specifications, internal D-3 Suffix C-6 target dot duration C-5, C-10 techniques (scanning) 32 Transmit Code 1D Char C-6 troubleshooting tips 32 Verify C-10 warning message 101 scanning 1D internal 32, 33 appending characters 101 safety instructions 31 symbologies 99, C-3 Translations tab 102 Scan Result 101 Scan Result Time 101 screen stylus, using to navigate 34 touch pen, using 34 Windows Embedded CE, navigating 34 SE 1223LR specifications D-4 SE 1224HP specifications D-5 SE 1524 ER specifications D-6 SE955 specifications D-3 Security C-10 See Symbol 24 Services 118 Settings Control Panel 39 Network and Dial-up connections 39 Run 39 Taskbar and Start Menu 39 Shell Settings (PsionVU settings) 94 SHIFT Key 22, 23 Short Code C-10 Shutdown Suspend 40 Shutdown (Start Menu) 40 Index signal quality, 802.11 29 SIM card, inserting 30 SIP (Soft Input Panel) 72 Snap Modules pinouts A-4 ST4000 (power only) 137 ST4001 (USB Host/Client) 137, A4 ST4005 (USB DE9M) 138, A4 SNTP, Registry Editor 116 Soft Input Panel Control Panel 51 Microsoft SIP 72 Soft Scan Timeout 102 sound settings 120 SPACE Key 23 specifications camera E-4 EA20X scanner D-9 EV15 1D imager D-7 HHP 5080 imager D-10 Omnii Hand-Held Computer E-3 scanner, internal D-3 ST4000 Snap Module 137 ST4001 Snap Module 137, A4 ST4004 quad docking station 145 cleaning 146 Ethernet 146 troubleshooting 146 ST4005 Snap Module 138, A4 Start Menu 36 cycle tasks 39 programs 37 Run 40 Settings 39 Shutdown 40 system tray 38 task manager 39 Stop Bits, port replicator 105 stylus (touch pen), using 34 Stylus Properties 109 Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 109 Suffix C-6 Surface Glossy B-4 Suspend (Shutdown menu) 40 Suspend Timeout 86 swap time (for battery) 21 24 symbologies, barcode 99, C-3 displaying type of barcode 101 Symbol Soft Input Panel (figure) 24 System Properties 110 system tray 38 T Tab Key 23 target dot, duration of C-5, C-10 taskbar onscreen indicators 802.11 radio signal quality 29 AC power 29 battery 29 docking devices 30 modifier keys 29 using 35 task manager 39 TCP/IP, configuring 126128 themes, desktop 96 Total Recall Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual V Regulatory Draft Index backup Profile, creating 111 backup Profile, restoring 113 view Profile 113 touch pen, using 34 touchscreen recalibration 26, 109 stylus, using 34 touch pen, using 34 Translations parameters (barcodes) 102 Transmit Code 1D Char C-6 trigger, double-click 101 trigger mappings 81 Trigger On Sequence, port replicator 105 Trigger-Press Type, Manage Triggers menu 83 triggers, configuring 81 troubleshooting ST40004 146 troubleshooting tips (scanning) 32 U Use Virtual Serial Port F-7 V vehicle cradle 147 powered pinouts A-5 Verify C-10 video recorder, using 92 videos 90 Voice Call Lists 117 Call Management 119 conference calls 119 dialing a number 117 Phonebook 119 phone dialer 17, 116 phone options 17, 116 Services 118 Volume & Sounds Properties 120 W warm reset 16 warnings 101 warranty 1iii Wi-Fi Config 121126 Windows Start Menu See Start Menu 36 Windows 7 64 Windows Embedded CE, navigating in 33 Windows Explorer 37 Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up 65 Windows Vista 64 Wireless WAN F-3F-13 Use Virtual Serial Port F-7 Voice F-13 Wireless Zero Config G-1G-7 VI Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual Regulatory Draft
1 2 3 4 5 | user manual IV Regulatory Guide | Users Manual | 1.02 MiB |
OMNII HAND-HELD COMPUTER REGULATORY &
WARRANTY GUIDE January 26, 2012 PN 8000191.C ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Copyright 2012 by Psion Inc., Mississauga, Ontario, Canada This document and the information it contains is the prop-
erty of Psion Inc., is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Inc. Psion, Psion Teklogix, and Omnii are trademarks of Psion Inc. Other product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of other hardware, software, or service providers and are used herein for identification purposes only. Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only RETURN TO FACTORY WARRANTY Psion provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve (12) months in accordance with the statement of Warranty and Product Support provided at:
http://www.psion.com/warranty The warranty on Psion manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion service organization. See Psion terms and conditions of sale for full details. Important: Psion warranties take effect on the date of shipment. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC & Waste Batteries Directive 2006/66/EC This Product, and its accessories, comply with the require-
ments of the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC. The batteries used in this Prod-
uct comply with the requirements of Directive 2006/66/EC. If your end-of-life Psion product, battery or accessory carries a label as shown here, please contact your local country rep-
resentative for details on how to arrange recycling. For a list of international subsidiaries, please go to:
http://www.psion.com/environmental-compliance.htm Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Restriction on Hazardous Substances
(RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC What is RoHS?
The European Union has mandated that high environmental standards be met in the design and manufacture of elec-
tronic and electrical products sold in Europe, to reduce haz-
ardous substances from entering the environment. The Restriction on Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) pre-
scribes the maximum trace levels of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, and flame retardants PBB and PBDE that may be contained in a product. Only products meeting these high environmental standards may be placed on the market in EU member states after July 1, 2006. RoHS Logo Although there is no legal requirement to mark RoHS-compli-
ant products, Psion Inc. indicates its compliance with the directive as follows:
The RoHS logo located either on the back of the product or underneath the battery in the battery compartment (or on a related accessory such as the charger or docking station) sig-
nifies that the product is RoHS-compliant as per the EU direc-
tive. Other than as noted below, a Psion product that does not have an accompanying RoHS logo signifies that it was placed on the EU market prior to July 1, 2006, and is thereby exempt from the directive. Note: Not all accessories or peripherals will have a RoHS logo due to physical space limitations or as a result of their exempt status. Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodi-
cally added to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication. Psion Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to typographical errors. Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Table Of Contents 1. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY . 3 2. REGULATORY SUMMARY. 5 3. SAFETY SUMMARY . 10 3.1 CHARGER ACCESSORIES SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. 10 3.2 IMAGER/LASER SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. 11 3.3 BATTERY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . 12 4. SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES . 15 4.1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT . 15 4.2 PRODUCT REPAIRS . 15 4.3 WORLDWIDE OFFICES . 16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 1 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only 1. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY When used in a residential, commercial or light industrial environ-
ment the product and its approved UK and European peripherals ful-
fil all requirements for CE marking. EU Directives This equipment complies with the essential requirements of EU Directives 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC, as applicable. Declarations are available from your local representative.
, 1999/5/, 2004/108/
2006/95/. . Toto zazen spluje zkladn poadavky smrnic EU 1999/5/ES, 2004/108/ES a 2006/95/ES, vdy dle konkrtnho zpsobu pouit. Pslun prohlen jsou k dispozici u vaeho loklnho distributora. Dette udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF, 2004/108/EF og 2006/95/EF, som er relevant. Erklringerne kan fs hos din lokale reprsentant. Tm laitteisto tytt seuraavat EU Direktiivien olennaiset vaatimuk-
set 1999/5/EY, 2004/108/EY ja 2006/95/EY, soveltuen. Vaatimusten-
mukaisuusvakuutukset ovat saatavilla paikalliselta edustajalta. Dit produkt voldoet aan de voorschriften van de richtlijnen van de EG Raad (1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC en 2006/95/EC), indien van toepass-
ing. Declaraties zijn beschikbaar bij uw locale vertegenwoordiger. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles des Directives de lUnion Europenne 1999/5/CE, 2004/108/CE et/ou 2006/95/CE. Veuillez consulter votre reprsentant local pour les dclarations applicables. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 3 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Ezen kszlk technikai jellemzi megfelelnek a vonatkoz 1999/5/
EC, 2004/108/EC s 2006/95/EC EU rendeletekben foglalt kvet-
elmnyeknek. A megfelelsgi dokumentci a gyrt helyi partnere-
inl ll az n rendelkezsre. Questo prodotto,ove applicabile, risponde alle direttive Europee 1999/
5/EC, 2004/108/EC e 2006/95/EC. Dichiarazioni sono disponibili presso il vostro rappresentante locale. Ten sprzt jest zgodny z oglnymi wymaganiami Dyrektyw UE nr 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC i 2006/95/EC, na ile znajduj zastosowanie. Owiadczenia s dostpne u lokalnych przedstawicieli. Acest echipament este in conformitate cu cerintele esentiale ale Directivelor EU 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC si 2006/95/EC. Certificatele sunt disponibile la reprezentanta locala. Toto zariadenie spa zkladn poiadavky smernc E 1999/5/ES, 2004/108/ES a 2006/95/ES, vdy poda konkrtneho spsobu pouitia. Prslun vyhlsenia s k dispozcii u vho loklneho dis-
tributora. Das Gert erfllt die wesentlichen Anforderungen der EU-Direktiven 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC und 2006/95/EC, soweit anwendbar. Eine entsprechende Bescheinigung kann bei Ihrem zustndigen Ver-
triebspartner angefordert werden. Ta oprema je skladna in izpolnjuje nujne zahteve direktiv EU 1999/5/
ES, 2004/108/ES in 2006/95/ES. Deklaracije so na voljo pri vaem krajevnem predstavniku. 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC kai 2006/95/EC
. 4 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Dan l-apparat huwa konformi mar-regolamenti stipulati mid-Direttivi Ewropej 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC u 2006/95/EC skond kif inhu app-
likabbli. Kopji ta dawn id-dikjarazjonijiet huma aessibbli mingand ir-rappreentant locali tiegek. Este equipo cumple com las condios vigorantes de la EU diretivas 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC e 2006/95/EC, com pertinente. Las normativas esto disponvel com su representado local. Este equipo cumple con los requerimientos esenciales de las directi-
vas de la EU 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC y 2006/95/EC, si es aplicable. Dichas declaraciones estn en poder de sus representantes locales. i iranga atitinka esminius ES direktyvu 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC ir 2006/95/EC reikalavimus. Deklaracijas galima gauti i Jusu vietinio atstovo. is iekartas atbilst ES direktivu 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC un 2006/95/
EC prasibam. Deklaracijas ir pieejamas regionalajas parstavniecibas. See seadmed vastavad olulistele nuetele ELi direktiivide 1999/5/EC, 2004/108/EC ja 2006/95/EC, mida kohaldatakse. Deklaratsioonid on saadaval Teie kohaliku esindaja. Use of the 802.11 device in France: owing to French Government restrictions, the 802.11 device is limited to indoor use. It may be used outdoors, on private property, only with prior authorization from the French Ministry of Defense. 2. REGULATORY SUMMARY Federal Communications Commission Regulations:
15.19(a)(3):
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 5 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation. 15.105(b):
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. The antennas used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operation on the 5.15 - 5.25 GHz frequency band is restricted to indoor use only. The FCC requires indoor use for the 5.15 - 5.25 GHz band to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite Systems. The device is allowed to transmit on the 5.25 - 5.35 GHz, 5.47 - 5.725 GHz and 5.725 - 5.850 GHz bands when associated with an access point (AP), in an outdoor environment. 6 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only RF Exposure Information (SAR) This mobile equipment meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This equipment is designed and manufac-
tured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio fre-
quency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard for wireless equipment employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the equipment transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the high-
est certified power level, the actual SAR level of the equipment while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the equipment is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various equipment and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this equipment with all reported SAR levels evaluated in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this equipment is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/fccid after searching on FCC ID: GM37545MBW or GM37545LBWA. For body worn operation, this equipment has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines for use with a Psion accessory that positions it the required minimum distance from the body. Use of other non-Psion approved accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn accessory and are not holding the equipment at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 1.5 cm from your body when the equipment is switched on. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 7 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC) Statement:
The UMTS radio variant of the Omnii has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in this product that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this product thor-
oughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or Psion for information on hearing aid compatibil-
ity. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or Psion. The UMTS radio variant of the Omnii has been tested to the interna-
tional standard ANSI C63.19 to ensure compatibility with hearing-aids and has been categorized as having an M and T rating of 3. To check if this is compatible with a particular hearing aid, add the M or T rating of the equipment to that of the hearing aid. If the result is 4 then this should indicate the combination is usable; if the result is 5 then the combination should provide normal use and if the result is 6 or more, then the combination should provide excellent perform-
ance. Industry Canada Regulations This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. 2. this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada appli-
cables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 8 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only 2. lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radi-
olectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This category II radio communication device complies with industry standard RSS-310. Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de catgorie II respecte la norme CNR-310 dIndustrie Canada. IMPORTANT NOTE:
Industry Canada Radiation Exposure Statement:
This device is in compliance with SAR for general population/uncon-
trolled exposure limits in RSS-102 and had been tested in accordance with the measurement methods and procedures specified in IEEE 1528. This equipment should be installed and operated with a mini-
mum distance of 1.5 cm between the radiator & your body. This device and its antennas must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antennas or transmitter. Emissions Information For Canada This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Cana-
dian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations (ICES-003). When using the 802.11 radio option, to prevent radio interference, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada (ICES-003). En cas dutilisation du module radio 802.11, afin d'viter toute inter-
frence radio avec le service autoris, l'appareil doit tre utilis Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 9 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only l'intrieur, tout en tant loign de toute fentre afin de garantir le maximum de protection. Si cet quipement (ou son antenne met-
trice) est install l'extrieur, il est alors soumis licence. Emissions Information for South Korea:
Class B Equipment (Residential Use) Class B Equipment (Residential Use) Warning for Australia The user needs to switch off the device when exposed to areas with potentially explosive atmospheres such as petrol stations, chemical storage depots and blasting operations. 3. SAFETY SUMMARY 3.1 CHARGER ACCESSORIES SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for chargers. Important: To avoid the risk of fire or personal injury, use only the AC adaptor recommended by Psion. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) charger, (2) battery and (3) product using battery. The mains power cord shall comply with national safety regu-
lations of the country where the equipment is to be used. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Psion may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury. To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger, pull the plug rather than the cord. 10 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to damage or stress. Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service personnel. Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qual-
ified service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely nec-
essary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, ensure:
- The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the charger.
- The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG. For indoor use only. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow. Do not connect the Ethernet port of the accessory to outdoor cables. Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel. 3.2 IMAGER/LASER SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Important: When equipped with an imager or scanner:
This product is a Class I/Class II LED/laser product according to CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 and Class1/Class 2 LED /laser product according to IEC 60825-1 2nd edition. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 11 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Warnings For your safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:
Caution! Do not look into the laser beam or point the beam at people or animals. Using controls or adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Using optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. 3.3 BATTERY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Warning: BATTERIES MUST BE DISPOSED OF SAFELY AND PROPERLY AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL LEG-
ISLATION. For proper disposal, forward all used batter-
ies to one of:
Psion Corporation Psion Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. 3000 Kustom Drive Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 You can also contact your local Psion representative for battery dis-
posal information in your area, or go to the following web site to locate a Psion office:
Psion S.A. Parc Club Du Golf-Bat 1. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3 France Hebron, Kentucky USA 41048 http://www.psion.com/us/about/contact_psion-offices.htm Warning: Counterfeit Lithium-Ion Battery Packs!
Only use genuine Psion battery packs. Counterfeit battery packs and battery packs re-manufactured using non original battery cells and components could pose a safety hazard due to poor quality components and/or lack of safety protection circuits. Non genuine battery packs are also not likely to meet the strict functional and environmental specification required for safe and correct operation when used in Psion equip-
12 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only ment. Using or attempting to recharge non genuine battery packs could result in poor performance, product damage, excessive heat being generated, battery leak-
age, fire or explosion resulting in personal injury. To avoid these issues only purchase and use genuine battery packs from authorized Psion distributors. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Explosiongefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz darf nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ erfol-
gen. Gebrauchte Batterien sind nach Angaben des Her-
stellers zu entsorgen. The battery must be fully charged before first use. Warning: Before charging or using the battery pack, it is critical that the safety information in this section be reviewed and that all warnings are strictly followed. TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid, generating heat or exploding, adhere to the precautions below. Warning:
Caution! Danger of fire, explosion, leakage or other hazard if a battery is incorrectly handled, charged, disposed of or replaced. The battery incorporates built-in safety devices. To ensure their proper function, do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed terminals with metal objects such as wire. Do not transport or store the battery together with metal objects such as necklaces, hair pins, etc. Do not dispose of batteries in fire as they may explode or release toxic materials and cause burns. Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a fire or heater. Do not immerse the battery in water. Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 13 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only When charging, use the charging device specifically designed for the battery. Do not pierce, strike, throw or step on the battery. Do not directly solder the battery. Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet, vehicle cigarette lighter, etc. Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container. Immediately remove the battery from the device or charger and stop use if the battery gives off an odour, generates heat, becomes discoloured or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal during use. Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the specified charge time. The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks. Always ensure that it is away from any exposed flames. If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes, rinse them with clean running water, and immediately seek medical attention. Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures (e.g., a vehicle, strong direct sunlight, etc.). This may cause the bat-
tery to overheat or ignite, and it may also reduce the perform-
ance and service life of the battery. Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the manufacturer guarantees. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Do Not Operate In An Explosive Atmosphere! Operating Psion equipment where explosive gas is present may result in an explosion. Do not remove covers or open enclosures! To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment without the covers and enclosures properly installed. Avoid dropping the hand-held or battery. If the computer or the battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the operator suspects damage, have it checked by qualified service personnel. 14 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only 4. SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES Psion provides a complete range of product support services to its customers worldwide. These services include technical support and product repairs. 4.1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT For technical support in North America:
Call Toll free: +1 800 387 8898 Option 3, or Direct Dial:
+1 905 813 9900 Ext. 1999 Option 3. For technical support outside of North America, please follow the link for your region on the Psion Community Support web site at:
http://community.psion.com/support 4.2 PRODUCT REPAIRS For repair service in North America:
Call Toll free: +1 800 387 8898 Option 2 or Direct Dial:
+1 905 813 9900 Ext. 1999 Option 2. For repair service outside of North America, please contact your local office listed in the following document:
http://www.psion.com/documents/com/quickReferenceGuides/
Help_Desk_Contact_Numbers_A4.pdf Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide 15 Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only 4.3 WORLDWIDE OFFICES
+1 905 813 9900
+1 905 812 6300 COMPANY HEADQUARTERS Psion Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9 Tel:
Fax:
E-mail: salescdn@psion.com NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS & U.S. SERVICE CENTRE Psion Corporation 3000 Kustom Drive Hebron, Kentucky USA 41048 Tel:
Fax:
E-mail: salesusa@psion.com INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES
+1 859 371 6006
+1 859 371 6422 www.psion.com/us/about/contact_psion-offices.htm Psion S.A. La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France
+33 4 42 90 88 09 Tel:
Fax:
+33 4 42 90 88 88 E-mail: tekeuro@psion.com Psion Espana S.L. Plaza de la Pau, s/n Edificio 3, 2 08940 Cornella de Llobregat, Barcelona, Spain
+34 902 884 220
+34 934 750 230 ptxspain@psion.com 16 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only 8 0 0 0 1 9 1 18 Psion Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide Draft #2 - For Review Purposes Only
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-11-06 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2012-06-27 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
3 | 2012-04-20 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
4 | 2012-03-23 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | Change in identification of presently authorized equipment. Original FCC ID: QIPPH8-P Grant Date: 10/21/2011 | |
5 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 | Effective |
2015-11-06
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2012-06-27
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2012-04-20
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
2012-03-23
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Psion Inc
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0006929947
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Physical Address |
One Motorola Plaza
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
Holtsville, New York
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
d******@phoenix-testlab.de
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
D******@phoenix-testlab.de
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grantee Code |
GM3
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Product Code |
7545MBWP
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
S******** D****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
905 8******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
905 8********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
s******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Wireless Module | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA Module | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Modular Equipment Type | Limited Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Single Modular Approval | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Change in identification of presently authorized equipment. Original FCC ID: QIPPH8-P Grant Date: 10/21/2011 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change allows third party installation of this module according to the installation guide and KDB 996369. Portable host configuration is limited to holster use as documented in the filing. The highest reported SAR values are Head 0.78 W/kg; Body-worn 1.02 W/kg, simultanous 1.18W/kg. HAC Rating M3/T3 - 2007. Limited Single Modular Approval. Output power listed is peak conducted. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and applicable warnings for end users and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Antenna gain must meet RF exposure and max radiated output power limits of the applicable rule section. This Grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. The max. antenna gain for this device as reported to the FCC is: 0.89 dBi (850MHz) and 1.6 dBi (1900MHz). (Date of Grant: 03/23/2012) Class II Permissive Change: This Class II Permissive Change is to install this module in a portable platform FCC ID: GM37545MBW. SAR compliance for portable use conditions has been evaluated as described in this filing. The highest reported SAR value is 0.10 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change allows third party installation of this module according to the installation guide and KDB 996369. Portable host configuration is limited to holster use as documented in the filing. The highest reported SAR values are Head 0.78 W/kg; Body-worn 1.02 W/kg, simultanous 1.18W/kg. HAC Rating M3/T3 - 2007. Output power listed is peak conducted. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This module is approved for use in products operating as fixed or portable transmitting device. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. A separate approval is required for portable operating configurations, as defined in 2.1093 of the rules. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and applicable warnings for endusers and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Antenna gain must meet RF exposure and max radiated output power limits of the applicable rule section. This Grant is valid only when the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. The max. antenna gain for this device as reported to the FCC is: 0.89 dBi (850MHz) and 1.6 dBi (1900MHz). | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Class II Permissive Change adds portable host configuration which is limited to holster use as documented in the filing. The highest reported SAR values are Head 0.78 W/kg; Body-worn 1.02 W/kg, simultanous 1.18W/kg. HAC Rating M3/T3 - 2007. Output power listed is peak conducted. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This module is approved for use in products operating as fixed or portable transmitting device. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. A separate approval is required for portable operating configurations, as defined in 2.1093 of the rules. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and applicable warnings for endusers and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Antenna gain must meet RF exposure and max radiated output power limits of the applicable rule section. This Grant is valid only when the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. The max. antenna gain for this device as reported to the FCC is: 0.89 dBi (850MHz) and 1.6 dBi (1900MHz). | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Output power listed is peak conducted. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. This OEM module is approved for use in products operating as fixed or portable transmitting device. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. A separate approval is required for portable operating configurations, as defined in 2.1093 of the rules. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and applicable warnings for endusers and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Antenna gain must meet RF exposure and max radiated output power limits of the applicable rule section. This Grant is valid only when the device is sold to OEM integrators and the OEM integrators are instructed to ensure that the end user has no manual instructions to remove or install the device. The max. antenna gain for this device as reported to the FCC is: 0.89 dBi (850MHz) and 1.6 dBi (1900MHz). | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Firm Name |
Sporton International Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
PHOENIX TESTLAB GmbH
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
7layers AG
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Name |
A**** C******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
H******** B********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
R**** M******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
49-52********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
49-21********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
49-52********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
49-21********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
a******@sporton.com.tw
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
o******@phoenix-testlab.de
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 |
r******@7layers.de
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 2.588 | 2.5 ppm | 247KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.107 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 1.122 | 2.5 ppm | 4M19F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 2.5 ppm | 249KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.968 | 2.5 ppm | 251KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 1.38 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 2.588 | 2.5 ppm | 247KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.107 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 1.122 | 2.5 ppm | 4M19F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 2.5 ppm | 249KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.968 | 2.5 ppm | 251KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 1.38 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 2.588 | 2.5 ppm | 247KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.107 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 1.122 | 2.5 ppm | 4M19F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 2.5 ppm | 249KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.968 | 2.5 ppm | 251KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 1.38 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15B | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 2.588 | 2.5 ppm | 247KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.107 | 2.5 ppm | 247KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 1.122 | 2.5 ppm | 4M19F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.318 | 2.5 ppm | 249KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.968 | 2.5 ppm | 251KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 1.38 | 2.5 ppm | 4M17F9W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC